DEK Printing Machines User Manual
Uploaded by
KongHee LeeDEK Printing Machines User Manual
Uploaded by
KongHee LeeCopyright Statement
Copyright (c) 2000 DEK Printing Machines Limited. All Rights Reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgment
AutoFlex, FormFlex, Vortex and ProFlow are registered trademarks of DEK Printing Machines Limited.
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Inc.
Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Inc.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
HORIZON USER MANUAL
MANUAL ERRORS
MANUAL CHANGE REQUEST FORM
DEK WORLDWIDE
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
STAGE 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
STAGE 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
STAGE 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
STAGE 4A . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
STAGE 4B . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
STAGE 4C . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17
STAGE 5A . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
STAGE 5B . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35
STAGE 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.44
STAGE 5D . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.53
STAGE 5E . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.63
STAGE 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.72
STAGE 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.84
STAGE 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.88
STAGE 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.89
MENU PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . 1.93
SPC CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . 1.107
STATUS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . 1.113
SET PREFERENCES
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
PREFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
COMMS PROTOCOL OPTIONS . . . . . . . . 3.1
IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . 3.4
HOST COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
ERROR MESSAGES
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
ERROR RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
ERROR MESSAGE LISTING . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Software Version 6 User Manual
CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
PRINT CARRIAGE . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
PROFLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
SQUEEGEE . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13
CAMERA AXES . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
RAIL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
PASTE DISPENSE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . 5.21
SCREEN ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
SCREEN CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
SCREEN CLEANER . . . . . . . . . . 5.26
RISING TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28
MULTI INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . 5.31
AUTOFLEX TOOLING . . . . . . . . . . 5.32
MONITOR
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
LOG ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
HOST COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
CLEAR BATCH . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
BATCH LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
PERFORM DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
EVENT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
SYSTEM DISABLE . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
HOUSE KEEPING
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
SET DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
SET TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
PRINT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
COPY DATA . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
DELETE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
RECOVERY PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . 7.13
FEATURE LICENSING . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
2Di SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.14
SETUP TIPS. . . . . . . . . . . . 8.37
OPTIONS AFTER AN INSPECTION ALARM . . . . . . 8.38
IMAGE RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
MENU PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . 8.41
User Manual Software Version 6
CONTENTS
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
PASTE LOADING. . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER . . . . . . . . 9.18
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER . . . . . . . 9.35
SQUEEGEES . . . . . . . . . . . 9.49
PROFLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.54
Software Version 6 User Manual
CONTENTS
User Manual Software Version 6
MANUAL ERRORS
MANUAL ERRORS
INFORMATION IN THIS MANUAL IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT
NOTICE.
NO PART OF THIS MANUAL MAY BE REPRODUCED, TRANSMITTED IN ANY
FORM OR MEANS, ELECTRONICALLY OR MECHANICALLY, INCLUDING
PHOTOCOPYING AND RECORDING, FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT THE
EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF DEK PRINTING MACHINES LTD.
EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE DURING THE COMPOSITION OF THIS
MANUAL TO ENSURE THAT THE INFORMATION HAS BEEN CLEARLY
PRESENTED AND CORRECT IN ALL RESPECTS.
IF DURING THE USE OF THIS MANUAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS ARE
FOUND, OR THE READER CONSIDERS THAT IMPROVEMENTS ARE
NECESSARY TO OVERCOME ANY AMBIGUITY OR INACCURACIES, A
COPY OF THE FORM OVERLEAF SHOULD BE COMPLETED AND EITHER
FAXED OR FORWARDED TO THE ADDRESS BELOW, ACCOMPANIED WITH
A COPY OF THE RELEVANT PAGE AND/OR FIGURE OF THE MANUAL WITH
THE RECOMMENDATION.
Quality Manager
DEK Printing Machines Ltd
11 Albany Road
Granby Industrial Estate
Weymouth
Dorset DT4 9TH
England
Tel: +1305 760760
Fax +1305 760123
Software Version 6 User Manual
MANUAL CHANGE REQUEST FORM
MANUAL CHANGE REQUEST FORM
No.
CUSTOMER USE
COMPANY:
ORIGINATOR: Name/Dept:
Date:
MACHINE Type:
Serial Number:
Software:
MANUAL CHAPTER/FIGURE
REF:
RECOMMENDATION:
ENCLOSURES:
INTERNAL USE ONLY
MANUAL CHANGE Accepted:
Rejected (State Reason):
PRIORITY URGENT: Next Issue:
CHANGE DETAILS:
OTHER MANUALS AFFECTED:
CHANGE CARRIED OUT BY: Name:
AUTHORISED BY: Name: Date:
Signature:
Change Completed: Manual Chapter Issue Date:
User Manual Software Version 6
DEK WORLDWIDE
DEK WORLDWIDE
SALES AND SERVICING
[Link]
DEK UK
Weymouth HQ DEK Printing Machines Limited
Granby Industrial Estate
Weymouth
Dorset, England. DT4 9TH
Tel: Sales +1305 760760
Tel: Call Centre +1305 208322
Fax: Sales +1305 208389
Fax: Call Centre +1305 208382
E-mail: sales@[Link]
callcentre@[Link]
DEK FRANCE DEK France
Parc des Barbanniers
4 Allee de Carre
92230 Gennevilliers
France
Tel: + 47921876
Fax: + 47921878
DEK GERMANY DEK Printing Machines GmbH
Theodor-Heuss-Str. -57
61118 Bad Vibel
Germany
Tel: + 6101 5227-0
Fax: + 6101 5227 17
E-mail: pdiehl@[Link]
DEK CENTRAL EUROPE
DEK Central Europe
9027 Gyor
Gesztenyefa Ut 4
Hungary
Tel: +36 96 506960
Fax: +36 96 506961
Email: stechau@[Link]
Software Version 6 User Manual
DEK WORLDWIDE
DEK BENELUX Visit: Henri Wijnmalenweg 6
5657 EP Eindhoven
The Netherlands
Post: P.O. Box 7131
5605 JC Eindhoven
The Netherlands
Tel: + 31 40 2350788
Fax + 31 40 2350079
E-mail: mlaken@[Link]
DEK USA
East DEK USA Inc. 8 Bartles Corner Road
Building #200
Flemington
NJ USA 08822
Tel: + 908 782 4140
Fax: + 908 782 4774
E-mail: mshermock@[Link]
West DEK USA West Coast
487 Las Coches Street
Milpitas
CA 95035
USA
Tel: + 408 934 7320
Fax: + 408 934 7325
North Central DEK USA North Central
1000 East State Parkway
Unit K
Schaumburg
IL. 60173
USA
Tel: + 847 843 3847
Fax: + 847 843 2750
User Manual Software Version 6
DEK WORLDWIDE
DEK ASIA PACIFIC
Singapore DEK Asia Pacific Pte Ltd
10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65
Techpoint
Unit 01-05
Singapore 569059
Tel: + 484 7010
Fax: + 484 7011
E-mail pkoh@[Link]
Taiwan DEK Printing Machines Taiwan Branch
3F-2, No 51, Sec 2, Keelung Road
Taipei
Taiwan ROC
Tel: + 22 7394266
Fax: + 22 7394228
E-mail: dektwn@[Link]
Japan DEK Japan Ltd
Shimizu Building 1F
5-15, 2-Chome
Waseda
Misato-city
Saitama-Prf
341-0018
Japan
Tel: + 81-489-50-3750
Fax: + 81-489-58-7951
Shanghai DEK Printing Machines Ltd
Shanghai Office
Room 1301, Block A
No 527 Huai Hai Zhong Rd,
Shanghai 200020
China
Tel: + 86 21 53068245
Fax: + 86 21 53068248
E-mail: deksha@[Link]
Software Version 6 User Manual
DEK WORLDWIDE
User Manual Software Version 6
CHAPTER 1
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
INTRODUCTION
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
INTRODUCTION This chapter details the procedure for a product setup, in stages and are as
follows:
STAGE 1
Power Up and Log On
STAGE 2A STAGE 2B STAGE 2C
Loading a Product File - Loading a Product File - Loading a Product File -
Using Function Keys Using Bar Code Using Pocket Off Line Editor
STAGE 3
Editing a Product File
STAGE 4C
STAGE 4A STAGE 4B Tooling Setup - FormFlex
Fit Squeegees ProFlow Setup Load Screen &
Fit Squeegees/ProFlow
STAGE 5A STAGE 5B STAGE 5C
Tooling Setup - Tooling Setup - Tooling Setup -
Magnetic Pillars Vacuum Dedicated Tooling System
& Load Screen & Load Screen & Load Screen
STAGE 5D STAGE 5E
Tooling Setup - Tooling Setup -
MultiFlex AutoFlex
& Load Screen & Load Screen
STAGE 6
Vision System Setup
STAGE 7
Load Paste
Run a Product in Step Mode
STAGE 8
2Di Setup
STAGE 9
Running a Product
in Run Mode
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.1
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 1
STAGE 1 For machines with the remote board stop option, ensure that the machine is
correctly configured for the intended product. Carry out the appropriate one of
the following procedures:
• Camera to Remote Board Stop - LHS Configuration
• Camera to Remote Board Stop - RHS Configuration
• Remote Board Stop - LHS to RHS Configuration
• Remote Board Stop - RHS to LHS Configuration
• Remote Board Stop - Same Side Configuration
• Remote Board Stop to Camera Board Stop
See Technical Reference Manual, Rising Table Module Chapter, Replacement
Procedures, for the first five procedures and Technical Reference Manual,
Camera and Vision System Module Chapter, Replacement Procedures for the
Remote Board Stop to Camera Board Stop procedure.
Power Up and 1. Turn the mains isolator switch to On.
Log On
2. When the message ‘Press SYSTEM Switch To Initialize Printer or Select
Diagnostics or Load Data’ is displayed in the message prompt bar, either:
a) Select Load Data (F2) if the loaded product is unknown or needs to be
changed.
b) Go to Step 5 if the loaded product file is known to be the correct one.
Load Diagnost
Data
The following Load Data File window is displayed:
1.2 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 1
3. Use Left, Right, Up or Down function keys (F4-F7) to highlight the
required file.
Load Rebuild Left Right Up Down Exit
List
4. Press Load (F1).
Load Rebuild Left Right Up Down Exit
List
5. Initialize the machine by pressing the System button.
The selected file is now displayed on the status page.
The operator can change the language used in the display menus.
To select a different language continue with Step 6. If the correct language is
loaded go to Step 12.
6. Select Setup (F6).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
7. Select Change Language (F7).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
8. A list of installed languages is displayed. Select Up (F5), or Down (F6) until
the desired language is highlighted.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.3
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 1
9. Select Load (F1).
Load Up Down Exit
The message ‘Loading Language...’ is displayed. A delay of approximately 20
seconds take place and all displayed text is changed to the selected language.
The message ‘Language Loaded...’ is displayed.
10. Select Exit (F8).
Load Up Down Exit
11. Select Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
12. Select Monitor (F7).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
13. Select Log On (F1).
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
The Operator Log On window is displayed:
Using the keyboard, enter the operator’s name/ID and press Enter on the
keyboard, the operator’s name/ID appear on the status page.
1.4 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 1
14. Select Exit (F8).
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
Off Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
If this is the correct file for the product proceed to Stage 4. If the file has to be
edited proceed to Stage 3.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.5
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 2
STAGE 2
Loading a 1. For an existing product, the product file has already been written. If the
Product File product is new, either edit an existing or a default file.
The product file displayed after the machine has been initialized is the same
one that was resident in the printer when it was powered down.
If this file is correct for the product continue to Stage 9 - Running a Product
in Run Mode.
If the product file is incorrect for the current product continue with this
procedure.
2. Press Setup (F6).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
3. Press Load Data (F2).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The following Load Data File window is displayed:
4. Use Left, Right, Up or Down function keys (F4-F7) to highlight the
required file.
Load Rebuild Left Right Up Down Exit
List
1.6 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 2
5. Press Load (F2).
Load Rebuild Left Right Up Down Exit
List
The selected file is now displayed on the monitor.
If this is the correct file for the product proceed to Stage 4. If the file has to be
edited proceed to Stage 3.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.7
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 3
STAGE 3
Editing a 1. Select Edit Data (F3).
Product File
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The following Edit Current Process Parameters window is displayed:
Edit Current Process Parameters
PRODUCT NAME Dek04
PRODUCT ID Dek04
DWELL HEIGHT 30 mm
DWELL SPEED 24 mm/s
SCREEN ADAPTOR NONE
SCREEN IMAGE EDGE
CUSTOM SCREEN DISABLED
BOARD WIDTH 101.5 mm
BOARD LENGTH 152.5 mm
BOARD THICKNESS 1.6 mm
PRINT SPEED 150 mm/s
FLOOD SPEED 20 mm/s
PRINT FRONT LIMIT 0.0 mm
PRINT REAR LIMIT 0.0 mm
.. more
2. Select Incr. (F6). Type in the required product name and press Enter using
the keyboard.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
3. Highlight Product ID using the Next key (F4). Select Incr. (F6). Type in the
required product ID and press Enter using the keyboard.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
4. Use the Next and Previous keys (F4 - F5) to highlight the relevant
parameter.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
1.8 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 3
5. Use either the Incr. and Decr. keys (F6 - F7) or the forward slash key (/) on
the keyboard to change the parameter value.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
NOTE
A definition of all editable parameters is contained at the end of this chapter.
6. Select Save (F2). The message ‘Saving fiducial data - Please wait
Board data file saved’ is displayed.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
7. Repeat Steps 4 - 6 for the remaining parameters.
8. Select Exit (F8).
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.9
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4A
STAGE 4A
Fit Squeegees
Fitting Squeegees If ProFlow was used when running the last product, carry out the ProFlow to
Squeegee Replacement Procedure, see Technical Reference Manual, Squeegee
Module Chapter - Replacement Procedures.
1. Select Setup (F6).
Run Head Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Load Screen
2. Select Setup Squeegee (F4).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
3. Select Change Squeegee (F1).
Change Calibrat Exit
Squeegee Heights
4. Lift the front printhead cover.
5. Before fitting the squeegees to the machine, fix the paste deflectors to each
end of the squeegee assemblies, using the screws supplied. Ensure that the
bottom edge of the deflector is above the lower edge of the squeegee blade.
The setting of the paste deflectors is carried out later in this chapter.
NOTE
The deflectors are handed so care must be taken to fix the correct deflector to
each end of the squeegee assemblies.
1.10 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4A
The front and rear squeegees must be fitted in the correct positions. Each
squeegee has a keyway machined into it to ensure that it cannot be incorrectly
fitted.
Rear Squeegee
Front Squeegee
Locking Screw Keyway Locking Screw
Fit to Rear
Squeegee Mount
Squeegee Blade Squeegee Holder
Side View of Squeegee Rear Squeegee (Front View)
and Squeegee Mounts
Fit to Front
Squeegee Mount
Side View of Squeegee Front Squeegee (Front View)
and Squeegee Mounts
NOTE
To prevent incorrect orientation when fitting squeegees, the locking screws on
the rear squeegee are positioned wider apart than those on the front
squeegee. Keyway slots are also in different positions.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.11
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4A
6. Fit the rear squeegee onto the rear squeegee mount, tightening the
thumbscrews until they are finger tight.
7. Fit the front squeegee onto the front squeegee mount, ensuring that the
thumbscrews are only finger tight.
8. Lower the front printhead cover.
9. Press the System button.
10. Select Continue (F1).
Continue
11. If fitted, remove stencil.
1.12 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4A
Squeegee Pressure To complete this calibration, machines with non-feedback pressure system carry
Height out steps 1-13. For machines with pressure feedback option fitted carry out steps
14 - 17.
Non Feedback 1. Press Calibrat Heights (F2).
Change Calibrat Exit
Squeegee Heights
The message ‘Ensure correct squeegees are fitted!’ is displayed.
2. Press Continue (F1).
Continue Restore Exit
Defaults
The message ‘Set Squeegee Pressure Height’ is displayed.
Either:
3. Press Adjust (F2).
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
The following window is displayed:
Squeegee Heights Parameters
Front Zero Ref 4000
Rear Zero Ref 4040
4. Using Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. (F4, F5, F6 and F7) enter the
squeegee heights parameters as necessary.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.13
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4A
5. Press Exit (F8).
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
6. Press Save (F3).
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
Or:
7. Using Step Up and Step Down (F6 and F7) as necessary to raise or lower
the front squeegee until it just touches the front rail.
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
8. Press Rear Squeegee (F5).
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
9. Using Step Up and Step Down (F6 and F7) as necessary to raise or lower
the rear squeegee until it just touches the front rail.
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
10. Press Save (F3).
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
11. Press Exit (F8).
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
12. Press Exit (F8).
Change Calibrat Exit
Squeegee Heights
1.14 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4A
13. Press Exit (F8)
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
Feedback Option 14. Press Calibrat Heights (F2).
Change Calibrat Exit
Squeegee Heights
The message ‘Ensure correct squeegees are fitted!’ is displayed.
15. Press Continue (F1).
Continue Restore Exit
Defaults
The message ‘Calibrating Pressure Heights - DO NOT Open Covers!’ is
displayed.
16. Press Exit (F8).
Continue Restore Exit
Defaults
17. Press Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.15
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4B
STAGE 4B
ProFlow Setup If squeegees were used when running the last product, carry out the Squeegees to
ProFlow Replacement Procedure, see Technical Reference Manual, ProFlow
Module Chapter - Replacement Procedures.
For setting the contact position, carry out the ProFlow Contact Position Setup,
see Technical Reference Manual, ProFlow Module Chapter - Adjustments and
Settings.
1.16 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4C
STAGE 4C
Tooling Setup - FormFlex
WARNING
BOARD CLAMPS. EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN
WORKING IN THE TOOLING AREA OF THE MACHINE TO AVOID
INJURY. THE FOILS ON THE FRONT AND REAR BOARD CLAMPS
ARE VERY SHARP.
CAUTION
BOARD CLAMPS. Care must be taken to ensure that the board clamps
are not damaged when removing or replacing tooling.
1. Select Change Screen (F5).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
2. When prompted, open the front printhead cover.
3. If fitted, remove the stencil.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.17
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4C
4. Using the appropriate stencil for the product file loaded, position the
FormFlex setup plate centrally over the stencil image.
5. Ensure the spring loaded plungers are in contact with the left side of the
stencil frame.
6. Close the central toggle lever.
1.18 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4C
7. Close the two outer toggle levers.
8. Load the stencil to the machine, ensuring the correct orientation of the
stencil.
9. Close the front printhead cover.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.19
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4C
10. Press the System button.
11. Select Change Screen (F5).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
12. Select Mode (F1) until Step is displayed in the printer status window.
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
13. Select Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
14. Select Run (F1).
Run Head Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Load Screen
15. Place a board on the conveyor.
16. Select Auto Board (F1).
Auto Manual Knead Exit
Board Board Paste
17. Select Step (F1) until the board is raised to Print Height.
Step Head Single Exit
1.20 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4C
18. Open the front printhead cover.
19. Rotate the operator switch on the operator interface to the right. When the
pneumatic indicator displays green, ensure all the Formflex pins have risen.
NOTE
The operator switch must remain in the latched position Pins Up whilst the
current product setup is required.
20. Close the front printhead cover.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.21
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4C
21. Press the System button.
22. Select Exit (F8).
Step Single Exit
23. Remove the board from the conveyor.
24. Select Setup (F6).
Run Head Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Load Screen
25. Select Change Screen (F5).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
26. When prompted, open the front printhead cover.
1.22 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4C
27. Remove the stencil.
28. Release the toggle levers amd remove the FormFlex setup plate from the
stencil.
29. Refit the stencil, ensuring the correct orientation.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.23
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 4C
30. Close the front printhead cover.
31. Press the System button.
32. Select Change Screen (F5).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
33. Continue with either of the following stages:
• Stage 4A - Fit Squeegees
• Stage 4B - ProFlow Setup
34. Go to Stage 6.
1.24 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5A
STAGE 5A
Tooling Setup -
Magnetic Pillars
Board Stop Setting up the board stop position is automatically done using the board
dimensions previously set in the board parameter file. If adjustment is necessary
proceed as follows:
1. Select Change Tooling (F6).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The print carriage and the under screen cleaner are moved to the rear.
The Change Tooling Parameters window is displayed:
Change Tooling Parameters
BOARD WIDTH 216.0 mm
BOARD STOP X 125.0 mm
BOARD STOP Y 142.6 mm
NOTE
If the remote board stop is fitted the Board Stop X and Board Stop Y parameters
are replaced by Remote Board Stop X.
These parameters are automatically calculated from the board size parameters
that were entered in the product file. If they need adjustment to re-position the
board stop for any reason, ie any routing on the board edge or a badly positioned
image on the screen, this can be done now.
2. Select Adjust (F1).
Adjust Open Home Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
3. Use the Next and Previous keys (F4 - F5) to highlight each parameter.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.25
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5A
4. Use the Incr. and Decr. keys (F6 - F7), or the forward slash key (/) on the
keyboard, to change the parameter value.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
5. Select Save (F2). The message ‘Saving fiducial data - Please wait
Board data file saved’ is displayed.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
6. Select Exit (F8).
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
7. Select Home Cleaner (F3).
Adjust Open Home Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
8. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
Magnetic Pillars
WARNING
BOARD CLAMPS. EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN
WORKING IN THE TOOLING AREA OF THE MACHINE TO AVOID
INJURY. THE FOILS ON THE FRONT AND REAR BOARD CLAMPS
ARE VERY SHARP.
CAUTION
BOARD CLAMPS. Care must be taken to ensure that the board clamps
are not damaged when removing or replacing tooling.
1. Select Change Screen (F5).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The message ‘Open Front Cover and Remove Screen’ is displayed.
1.26 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5A
2. Open the front printhead cover.
3. Remove the stencil from the printer.
4. Close the front printhead cover.
5. Press the System button.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.27
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5A
6. Select Change Tooling (F6).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
7. Select Home Cleaner (F3).
Adjust Open Home Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
8. Select Board Stop (F4).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
The camera moves to the board stop position. The board stop on the camera
extends.
9. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Remove Home Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Camera Width Width Height
10. Open the front printhead cover.
11. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
1.28 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5A
12. Slide a board along the rails to abut the board stop.
13. Select Board Clamps (F3), to close the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
14. Position the outermost support pins on the rising table under the board.
15. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
16. Remove the board and select Board Clamps (F3), to close the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.29
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5A
17. Complete the positioning of the support pins.
18. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
19. Slide the board back along the rails to abut the board stop.
20. Select Board Clamps (F3), to close the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
21. Close the front printhead cover.
22. Press the System button.
1.30 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5A
23. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
24. Select Home Camera (F4).
Adjust Open Remove Home Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Camera Width Width Height
25. Select Print Height (F7).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
26. Select Open Cover (F2).
Open Home Exit
Cover Position
27. Lift the front printhead cover.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.31
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5A
28. Check that the setup of the tooling is adequate for the board, adjust as
necessary.
29. Close the front printhead cover.
30. Press the System button.
31. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
32. Select Home Position (F7).
Open Home Exit
Cover Position
1.32 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5A
33. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
34. Lift the front printhead cover.
35. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
36. Remove the board from the rails.
37. Load the appropriate stencil for the product file loaded, ensuring the correct
orientation of the stencil.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.33
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5A
38. Close the front printhead cover.
39. Press the System button.
40. Select Change Screen (F2).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
41. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
42. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
43. Go to Stage 6.
1.34 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5B
STAGE 5B
Tooling Setup -
Vacuum
WARNING
BOARD CLAMPS. EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN
WORKING IN THE TOOLING AREA OF THE MACHINE TO AVOID
INJURY. THE FOILS ON THE FRONT AND REAR BOARD CLAMPS
ARE VERY SHARP.
CAUTION
BOARD CLAMPS. Care must be taken to ensure that the board clamps
are not damaged when removing or replacing tooling.
1. Select Change Screen (F5).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The message ‘Open Front Cover and Remove Screen’ is displayed.
2. Open the front printhead cover.
3. Remove the stencil from the printer.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.35
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5B
4. Close the front printhead cover.
5. Press the System button.
6. Select Change Tooling (F6).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The print carriage and the under screen cleaner are moved to the rear.
7. Select Full Width (F5).
Adjust Open Home Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
The message ‘Checking for a board on the belts’ is displayed. Whilst the rear
rail is moving the following message ‘Rail Moving...’ is displayed.
8. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Home Board Board Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
1.36 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5B
9. Lift the front printhead cover.
10. The vacuum box can now be fitted into the appropriate location holes in the
tooling plate. Ensure the vacuum box is placed into the correct set of holes
taking regard of the type of screen being used. Connect the vacuum hose to
the vacuum box inlet, ensure the hose is routed clear of any moving parts.
11. Lower the front printhead cover.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.37
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5B
12. Press the System button.
13. Select Home Cleaner (F3).
Adjust Open Home Board Board Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
14. Select Board Width (F5).
Adjust Open Remove Board Board Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
15. Select Board Stop (F4).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
The camera moves to the board stop position. The board stop on the camera
extends.
16. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Remove Home Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Camera Width Width Height
17. Open the front printhead cover.
1.38 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5B
18. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
19. Slide a board along the rails to abut the board stop.
20. Select Board Clamps (F3), to close the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
21. Close the front printhead cover.
22. Press the System button.
23. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
24. Select Home Camera (F4).
Adjust Open Remove Home Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Camera Width Width Height
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.39
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5B
25. Select Print Height (F7).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
26. Select Open Cover (F2).
Open Home Exit
Cover Position
27. Lift the front printhead cover.
28. Check that the setup of the tooling is adequate for the board, adjust as
necessary.
29. Close the front printhead cover.
30. Press the System button.
1.40 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5B
31. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
32. Select Home Position (F7).
Open Home Exit
Cover Position
33. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
34. Lift the front printhead cover.
35. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
36. Remove the board from the rails.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.41
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5B
37. Load the appropriate stencil for the product file loaded, ensuring the correct
orientation of the stencil.
38. Lower the front printhead cover.
39. Press the System button.
40. Select Change Screen (F2).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
41. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
1.42 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5B
42. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
43. Go to Stage 6.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.43
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5C
STAGE 5C
Tooling Setup - Dedicated Tooling System
WARNING
BOARD CLAMPS. EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN
WORKING IN THE TOOLING AREA OF THE MACHINE TO AVOID
INJURY. THE FOILS ON THE FRONT AND REAR BOARD CLAMPS
ARE VERY SHARP.
CAUTION
BOARD CLAMPS. Care must be taken to ensure that the board clamps
are not damaged when removing or replacing tooling.
1. Select Change Screen (F5).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The message ‘Open Front Cover and Remove Screen’ is displayed.
2. Open the front printhead cover.
3. Remove the stencil from the printer.
1.44 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5C
4. Close the front printhead cover.
5. Press the System button.
6. Select Change Tooling (F6).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The print carriage and the under screen cleaner are moved to the rear.
7. Select Full Width (F5).
Adjust Open Home Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
The message ‘Checking for a board on the belts’ is displayed. Whilst the rear
rail is moving the following message ‘Rail Moving...’ is displayed.
8. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Home Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.45
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5C
9. Lift the front printhead cover.
10. Fit the tooling tower to the manual plate. Ensure the dowels on the front edge
of the tooling tower base are correctly seated in the holes in the front edge of
the manual tooling plate.
View on Rear of Tooling Plate
11. Verify the plate assembly orientation and fit the assembly to the tooling
tower. Ensure the dowels of the plate assembly are correctly seated in the
holes in the tooling tower.
1.46 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5C
12. If required, slide additional magnetic pins beneath the plate assembly to fully
support it when printing wide boards.
13. Lower the front printhead cover.
14. Press the System button.
15. Select Home Cleaner (F3).
Adjust Open Home Board Board Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
16. Select Board Width (F5).
Adjust Open Remove Board Board Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.47
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5C
17. Select Board Stop (F4).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
The camera moves to the board stop position. The board stop on the camera
extends.
18. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Remove Home Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Camera Width Width Height
19. Open the front printhead cover.
20. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
21. Slide a board along the rails to abut the board stop.
22. Select Board Clamps (F3), to close the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
1.48 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5C
23. Close the front printhead cover.
24. Press the System button.
25. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
26. Select Home Camera (F4).
Adjust Open Remove Home Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Camera Width Width Height
27. Select Print Height (F7).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
28. Select Open Cover (F2).
Open Home Exit
Cover Position
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.49
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5C
29. Lift the front printhead cover.
30. Check that the setup of the tooling is adequate for the board, adjust as
necessary.
31. Close the front printhead cover.
32. Press the System button.
33. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
1.50 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5C
34. Select Home Position (F7).
Open Home Exit
Cover Position
35. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
36. Lift the front printhead cover.
37. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
38. Remove the board from the rails.
39. Load the appropriate stencil for the product file loaded, ensuring the correct
orientation of the stencil.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.51
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5C
40. Lower the front printhead cover.
41. Press the System button.
42. Select Change Screen (F2).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
43. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
44. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
45. Go to Stage 6.
1.52 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5D
STAGE 5D
Tooling Setup -
MultiFlex
WARNING
BOARD CLAMPS. EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN
WORKING IN THE TOOLING AREA OF THE MACHINE TO AVOID
INJURY. THE FOILS ON THE FRONT AND REAR BOARD CLAMPS
ARE VERY SHARP.
CAUTION
BOARD CLAMPS. Care must be taken to ensure that the board clamps
are not damaged when removing or replacing tooling.
NOTE
Setting up the MultiFlex tooling is to be performed off the machine.
1. Create a box the same size as the board using the side plates.
2. Use the board width and board length dimensions to position the box
correctly.
3. Place the PCB on a flat surface, component side up.
4. Position the acetate template, supplied with the tooling, over the PCB such
that the front edge of the board is aligned with the arrow indicators on the
template. Ensure that the centreline of the board is aligned with the template
zero.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.53
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5D
5. Using the grid co-ordinates marked on the template, position pins which
coincide with gaps between the underside board components.
6. Select Change Screen (F5).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The message ‘Open Front Cover and Remove Screen’ is displayed.
7. Open the front printhead cover.
1.54 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5D
8. Remove the stencil from the printer.
9. Close the front printhead cover.
10. Press the System button.
11. Select Change Tooling (F6).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The print carriage and the under screen cleaner are moved to the rear.
12. Select Full Width (F5).
Adjust Open Home Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
The message ‘Checking for a board on the belts’ is displayed. Whilst the rear
rail is moving the following message ‘Rail moving...’ is displayed.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.55
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5D
13. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Home Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
14. Open the front printhead cover.
15. The MultiFlex tooling can now be fitted into the appropriate location holes in
the tooling plate. Ensure that the tooling is placed into the correct set of
holes, taking regard of the type of screen being used and hence the position
of the fixed rail.
1.56 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5D
16. Lower the front printhead cover.
17. Press the System button.
18. Select Home Cleaner (F3).
Adjust Open Home Board Board Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
19. Select Board Width (F5).
Adjust Open Remove Board Board Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
20. Select Board Stop (F4).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
The camera moves to the board stop position. The board stop on the camera
extends.
21. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Remove Home Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Camera Width Width Height
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.57
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5D
22. Open the front printhead cover.
23. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
24. Slide a board along the rails to abut the board stop.
25. Select Board Clamps (F3), to close the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
26. Close the front printhead cover.
27. Press the System button.
1.58 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5D
28. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
29. Select Home Camera (F4).
Adjust Open Remove Home Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Camera Width Width Height
30. Select Print Height (F7).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
31. Select Open Cover (F2).
Open Home Exit
Cover Position
32. Lift the front printhead cover.
33. Check that the setup of the tooling is adequate for the board, adjust as
necessary.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.59
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5D
34. Close the front printhead cover.
35. Press the System button.
36. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
37. Select Home Position (F7).
Open Home Exit
Cover Position
38. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
1.60 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5D
39. Lift the front printhead cover.
40. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
41. Remove the board from the rails.
42. Load the appropriate stencil for the product file loaded, ensuring the correct
orientation of the stencil.
43. Lower the front printhead cover.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.61
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5D
44. Press the System button.
45. Select Change Screen (F2).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
46. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
47. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
48. Go to Stage 6.
1.62 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5E
STAGE 5E
Tooling Setup- The correct pins for each product are selected automatically when the board size
AutoFlex parameters are programmed into the product file. If the pin configuration needs
to be amended, for example if a support pin coincides with the position of an
underside component and needs to be removed, from the setup page:
WARNING
BOARD CLAMPS. EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN
WORKING IN THE TOOLING AREA OF THE MACHINE TO AVOID
INJURY. THE FOILS ON THE FRONT AND REAR BOARD CLAMPS
ARE VERY SHARP.
CAUTION
BOARD CLAMPS. Care must be taken to ensure that the board clamps
are not damaged when removing or replacing tooling.
1. Select Change Screen (F5).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The message ‘Open Front Cover and Remove Screen’ is displayed.
2. Open the front printhead cover.
3. Remove the stencil from the printer.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.63
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5E
4. Close the front printhead cover.
5. Press the System button.
6. Select Change Tooling (F6).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The print carriage and the under screen cleaner are moved to the rear.
The Change Tooling Parameters window is displayed:
Change Tooling Parameters
BOARD WIDTH 216.0 mm
BOARD STOP X 125.0 mm
BOARD STOP Y 142.6 mm
The parameters are not active.
7. Select Adjust (F1). The parameters are now active.
Adjust Open Home Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
1.64 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5E
8. Select Change Autoflex (F1).
Change Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Autoflex
The Autoflex Matrix window is displayed:
Autoflex Matrix
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 14
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
M
- - 1
A B C D E F G H I J K L N O
The Autoflex pin matrix has already been setup for this product from the board
dimensions.
9. Use the Left, Right, Up and Down keys (F4 - F7), to select the pin positions
required for editing.
Lower Raise Reset Left Right Up Down Exit
10. Use the Lower and Raise keys (F1 - F2), to select or deselect the pins.
Lower Raise Reset Left Right Up Down Exit
11. Select Exit (F8).
Lower Raise Reset Left Right Up Down Exit
12. Select Save (F2).
Change Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Autoflex
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.65
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5E
13. Select Exit (F8).
Change Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Autoflex
14. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Open Home Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
15. Select Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The rail moves to the board width and the selected Autoflex pins rise.
16. Select Setup (F6).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
17. Select Change Tooling (F6).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
18. Select Home Cleaner (F3).
Adjust Open Home Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
19. Select Board Stop (F4).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
The camera moves to the board stop position. The board stop on the camera
extends.
1.66 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5E
20. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Remove Home Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Camera Width Width Height
21. Open the front printhead cover.
22. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
23. Slide a board along the rails to abut the board stop.
24. Select Board Clamps (F3), to close the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
25. Close the front printhead cover.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.67
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5E
26. Press the System button.
27. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
28. Select Home Camera (F4).
Adjust Open Remove Home Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Camera Width Width Height
29. Select Print Height (F7).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
30. Select Open Cover (F2).
Open Home Exit
Cover Position
31. Lift the front printhead cover.
32. Check that the setup of the tooling is adequate for the board, adjust as
necessary.
1.68 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5E
33. Close the front printhead cover.
34. Press the System button.
35. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
36. Select Home Position (F7).
Open Home Exit
Cover Position
37. Select Open Cover (F2).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.69
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5E
38. Lift the front printhead cover.
39. Select Board Clamps (F3), to open the clamps.
Adjust Board Set Exit
Clamps Stop
40. Remove the board from the rails.
41. Load the appropriate stencil for the product file loaded, ensuring the correct
orientation of the stencil.
42. Lower the front printhead cover.
1.70 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 5E
43. Press the System button.
44. Select Change Screen (F2).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
45. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Change Board Set Exit
Screen Clamps Stop
46. Select Exit (F8).
Adjust Open Remove Board Full Load Print Exit
Cover Cleaner Stop Width Width Height
47. Go to Stage 6.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.71
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
STAGE 6
Vision System Setup The printer uses a vision system to carry out the following:
Introduction
• Stencil/Board Alignment
• 2Di Inspection (optional)
• Board Identification - Selective Print/Pass Through (optional)
After the board is fed to the board stop position, the camera moves into position
to view the relative board and screen features. The information from these
camera images is used by the vision system to identify the board, if selective
print/pass through is enabled and to calculate the screen correction needed to
align the screen to the board. The camera and vision system is also used for 2Di
inspection, if enabled, for further information refer to the 2Di chapter in this
manual.
Fiducials A fiducial is an alignment mark which is produced as a part of the artwork of the
board and the screen. There are normally several of these marks on each board,
some of which are used for board alignment and some for alignment when
placing components on the board. These marks, therefore, should be in the same
relative position on both board and screen.
The vision system has a library of synthetic fiducials of the most commonly
found shapes. The dimensions of these fiducials can be tailored by the operator
to fit the fiducials on the board and screen. After the vision system has been
taught these fiducial parameters, it is able to search the field of view of the
camera and recognize any features which resemble these fiducials. The centre of
the fiducial is calculated and used as the point of location.
The vision system conducts a search in the field of view of the camera looking
for any shape that resembles the programmed fiducial. After finding a shape it is
assigned a score comparing its shape and size to the shape and size of the fiducial
in the vision system memory. This score is set between 1 and 999, the better the
fit the higher the score.
NOTE
However, this does not mean that a fiducial score of 900 for example aligns more
accurately than a fiducial score of 700 for example.
This score is used, in conjunction with acceptance parameters set by the
operator, to recognize the fiducial. The available fiducial shapes are:
• Circle
• Rectangle
• Diamond
• Triangle
• Double Square
• Cross
CIRCLE CROSS DIAMOND TRIANGLE RECTANGLE DOUBLE SQUARE
1.72 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
Fiducial Parameters There are a number of parameter values which need to be adjusted when setting
up a fiducial.
Fiducial Type This refers to the shape and dimensions of the fiducial.
Background The vision system needs to know if the fiducial is surrounded by a dark or light
background compared to the fiducial colour.
Acceptance Score After the vision system has located a screen or board fiducial, it assigns a level of
match of that fiducial compared to the fiducial strategy set in the vision system.
This is given a score, the better the match the higher the score. The acceptance
score is the minimum level, set by the operator, above which the vision system
accepts the recognition of the fiducial.
Minimum 0
Maximum 999
Increment 10
Default 700
There are various dimensions of each fiducial shape which have to be set by the
operator. As an example, here, the circular fiducial is described.
OUTER CONTOUR FIDUCIAL DIAMETER
INNER CONTOUR GEOMETRIC CENTRE
(USED AS LOCATION POINT)
Fiducial Diameter This needs to be set to the exact diameter of the fiducial to achieve a satisfactory
score.
Inner and Outer These are set to eliminate any defects that may occur in the surface of either the
Contours fiducial or the background. The vision system ignores anything inside the inner
contour and outside the outer contour. Increasing the distance between the inner
and outer contour can, if the fiducial and background surfaces are variable,
drastically affect the score level.
Select Mark A select mark is an identification mark, placed only on the board, to differentiate
between boards to be printed and boards to be passed through the printer without
printing. A select mark has the same properties and parameters as a fiducial, as
described above. A select mark is only used with the selective print/pass through
option, where different product boards are fed through the printer.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.73
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
Video Model The video model is an alternative to using fiducials for board alignment. Video
model uses the correlation between the image of an area of the screen and the
image of the same area of the board to align the two. This is useful if the board
has no fiducials or the condition of the fiducials does not allow satisfactory
recognition (see optimizing a video model).
Mono Monitor Fiducial Box
Video Model Fiducial
X Y Reference
Image Quality The vision system is able to accept a wide variation of quality of fiducial,
therefore any variation in lighting normally causes no problems with fiducial
recognition. However the image quality can be optimized by ensuring the
lighting levels are correct. Changing the intensity of the vision illumination is
achieved by the adjustment of the software controlled lighting during Fiducial
setup.
1.74 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
Histogram The histogram gives a graphical representation of the grey scale values within
the box set around the fiducial. As can be seen there are two peaks which
represent the light and dark areas of the picture. Ideally there should be two
distinct peaks, the separation of which can be changed by varying the lighting
levels.
Experience of changing these parameters, while viewing the histogram,
demonstrates their effects.
% Area
Within Box
Black Mid Grey White
Darker Lighter
Optimizing a When using a Video Model, selection of a good image shape is critical. The
Video Model following are some basic guidelines for selection of an optimum image.
Fine And Course As with fiducials, areas of a board selected as a Video Model should have shapes
Features with a solid consistent tone within the boundaries ( course features ) and not
shapes with inner lines or lettering (fine features):
Model with Model with
Fine Features Course Features
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.75
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
Positional When selecting a Video Model, if the image shapes have edges all in the X
Information direction or all in the Y direction, not enough positional information exists for
the camera system. An image with good X and Y information is necessary for
accurate positioning:
No positional information No Positional information Equal positional information
in the Y direction in the X direction in the X and Y directions.
1.76 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
Preparing the Vision System
The vision system learns the fiducial during a board setup. The fiducial
coordinates are entered into the product file during the editing of a default file.
This enables the camera to find the fiducials initially. The setup needs to be run
in step mode from the status page.
The following procedure is typical for all fiducial shapes, although in this
instance a circle fiducial shape is referred to throughout.
Video Model
The procedure for Creating a Video Model is very similar to that for a
fiducial, throughout this following Fiducial procedure, boxes like this
contain alternative procedure steps, to allow the setup of a Video Model.
1. Select Mode (F1) till Step is indicated in the mode option on the screen.
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
2. Select Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
3. Place the board on to the conveyor.
4. Select Run (F1).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
5. Select Auto Board (F1).
Auto Manual Knead Exit
Board Board Paste
6. Select Step (F1).
Step Head Inspect Single Exit
Setup
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.77
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
7. Select Step (F1).
Step Open Inspect Single Exit
Cover Setup
The board fiducial/select mark should now be visible on the vision data window.
If selective print/pass through is enabled, the image on the left hand side of the
monitor is the board select mark. The right hand side of the monitor shows the
corresponding position on the screen, which is a mirror image of the board
without the select mark. While the select mark is being setup and the menu bar is
as Step 8, the message ‘The form of this fiducial will select Print / Pass
through.’ is displayed.
If the fiducial is in the field of view go to Step 10. If the fiducial is not in the field
of view, continue with Step 8.
8. Select Search Step (F5).
Step Open Fiducial Adjust Search Search Single Exit
Cover Setup Step Reset
For each press of Search Step the camera conducts an increasing spiral search to
enable the operator to locate the fiducial. If this search is not sucessful the
camera can be returned to its origin. Recheck the fiducial co-ordinates set in the
product file.
9. Select Search Reset (F6).
Step Open Fiducial Adjust Search Search Single Exit
Cover Setup Step Reset
When the fiducial is located move it to the centre of the screen.
10. Select Adjust (F4).
Step Open Fiducial Adjust Search Search Single Exit
Cover Setup Step Reset
1.78 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
The co-ordinates of the fiducial in the field of view are now displayed on the
screen.
BOARD FIDUCIAL1 CO-ORDINATES
FIDUCIAL1 X x x x mm
FIDUCIAL1Y x x x mm
Position the fiducial in the centre of the box graphic.
11. Use the Next and Previous keys (F4 - F5), to highlight each co-ordinate.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
12. Use the Incr. And Decr. Keys (F6 - F7), to change the parameter value and
move the fiducial in the field of view.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
13. Select Exit (F8).
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
14. Select Fiducial Setup (F3).
Step Open Fiducial Adjust Search Search Single Exit
Cover Setup Step Reset
The monitor displays the following:
Board Fiducial 1 Circle Parameters
FiducialType
Printer Status Circle Process Parameters
Diameter 1.80 mm
Background Dark Inner Contour 0.40 mm
Accept Score 700 Outer Contour 0.40 mm
15. Select Set Light (F3).
Learn Locate Set Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Fiducial Fiducial Light
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.79
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
A histogram is displayed on the monitor and the Fiducial Lighting Parameters
window is displayed on the status page.
Fiducial Lighting Parameters
Screen On Axis 14
Screen Off Axis 14
Board On Axis 14
Board Off Axis 14
Window Left -1.0
Window Top -1.5
Window Width 2.0
Window Height 2.0
16. Use the Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys (F4 - F7), to highlight and
adjust the lighting parameters to a level whereby the fiducials are just
whiting out, without blooming, default level 8 is usually adequate for the
majority of setups.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
17. Select Exit (F8).
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
18. Use the Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys (F4 - F7), to highlight and
adjust each of the board fiducial parameters in the left hand box on the
monitor.
Learn Locate Set Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Fiducial Fiducial Light
Board Fiducial 1
FiducialType
Printer Status Circle
Background Dark
Accept Score 700
Video Model
To setup a video model, choose Video Model from the Fiducial Type
Parameter.
1.80 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
19. Select Learn Fiducial (F1).
Learn Locate Set Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Fiducial Fiducial Light
Setup the fiducials appearing in the right hand box on the monitor.
Circle Parameters
Position X xxx mm
Position Y xxx mm
Diameter xxx mm
Inner Contour xxx mm
Outer Contour xxx mm
Video Model
When using video model the parameters are as follows:
Video Model, Position X, Position Y, Fiducial X, Fiducial Y
20. Use the Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys (F4 - F7), to highlight and
adjust each circle parameter in turn to obtain the best fit over the fiducial.
Learn Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Fiducial
NOTE
Once aligned it may be necessary to change the line fiducial dimension to
achieve a better fit.
21. Select Learn Fiducial (F1). The message ‘Learning Fiducial - Please
Wait’ is displayed in the message prompt bar.
Learn Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Fiducial
22. Select Exit (F8).
Learn Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Fiducial
23. Select Locate Fiducial (F2).
Learn Locate Set Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Fiducial Fiducial Light
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.81
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
A figure appears on the monitor indicating the score of the fit between the
synthetic fiducial and the actual fiducial. The synthetic fiducial parameters may
need resetting and relearning to obtain a better figure if there are other features in
the camera window.
Location
Fiducial X Y Score
1 0.038 -0.017 984
24. Select Exit (F8).
Locate Exit
Fiducial
25. Select Exit (F8).
Learn Locate Set Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Fiducial Fiducial Light
26. Select Step (F1).
Step Open Fiducial Adjust Search Search Single Exit
Cover Setup Step Reset
NOTE
If selective print/pass through is enabled, the first board fiducial should now be
displayed on the monitor. In this case repeat Steps 14 - 26 for this fiducial.
The first screen fiducial should now be displayed on the monitor.
27. Repeat Steps 14 - 25 for this fiducial.
28. Continue for other selected fiducials by selecting Step at the end of each
fiducial setup.
29. After Step 28 for the second screen fiducial the message
’Saving Fiducial Data - Please Wait
Board data file saved’ is displayed.
After aligning screen to board the camera checks all four fiducial positions.
1.82 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 6
30. Select Exit (F8).
Step Single Exit
31. Select Exit (F8).
Auto Manual Exit
Board Board
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.83
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 7
STAGE 7
Load Paste, Run a If using squeegees with paste dispenser continue with Section Auto Paste
Product in Step Dispense. If using squeegees without paste dispenser go to Section Manual
Mode Paste Load. If using ProFlow go to Section Run a Product in Step Mode.
Auto Paste Dispense 1. Select Paste Load (F3).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Select Auto Dispense (F1).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
3. Select Exit (F8).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
4. Go to Section Run a Product in Step Mode.
Manual Paste Load 1. Select Paste Load (F3).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Select Manual Load (F2).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
3. Lift the front printhead cover.
1.84 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 7
WARNING
SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENTS. WHEN USING OR HANDLINGANY
S O L D E R PA S T E O R S O LV E N T F O R M U L AT I O N T H E
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE STRICTLYADHERED TO.
4. Load the solder paste onto the screen.
5. Lower the front printhead cover.
6. Press the System button.
7. Select Continue (F1).
Continue
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.85
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 7
8. Select Exit (F8).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
Run a Product in Step 1. Select Run (F1).
Mode
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Load a board on to the conveyor.
3. Select Auto Board (F1).
Auto Manual Knead Exit
Board Board Paste
4. Select Step (F1).
Step Open Inspect Single Exit
Cover Setup
5. Select Step (F1).
Step Open Inspect Single Exit
Cover Setup
6. Select Step (F1).
Step Open Fiducial Adjust Search Search Single Exit
Cover Setup Step Reset
7. Select Step (F1).
Step Open Fiducial Adjust Search Search Single Exit
Cover Setup Step Reset
1.86 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 7
8. Select Step (F1).
Step Open Fiducial Adjust Search Search Single Exit
Cover Setup Step Reset
9. Select Step (F1).
Step Open Fiducial Adjust Search Search Single Exit
Cover Setup Step Reset
10. Select Step (F1).
Step Inspect Single Exit
Setup
11. Select Auto Board (F1).
Auto Manual Exit
Board Board
12. Remove the board from the conveyor and inspect the print for alignment. If
the alignment is satisactory go to Step 16, if the alignment needs adjusting,
calculate the following:
X Offset, Y Offset and q Offset.
13. Select Edit Data (F3).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
14. Enter the X Offset, Y Offset and q Offset, calculated in Step 12 to both the
Forward and Reverse set of offsets.
15. Repeat Steps 1 - 12 until the alignment is correct for both a forward and
reverse print.
16. If 2D Inspection is being used continue with Stage 9, if 2D Inspection isn’t
being used go to Stage 10.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.87
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 8
STAGE 8
2Di Setup For a complete explanation of 2Di and its setup refer to the 2D Inspection
Chapter.
1.88 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 9
STAGE 9
Running a Product 1. Select Setup (F6)
in Run Mode
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Select Mode (F1) until Auto is indicated in the mode option on the screen.
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
3. Select Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
4. Select Run (F1). If squeegees are being used continue with Step 5, if
ProFlow is being used go to Step 19.
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
5. During the first print stroke, when the squeegee is down printing on the
board, select Stop Cycle (F2). The print cycle stops and the printer lid bolt
releases allowing access to the print carriage.
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead Adjust
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste Inspect
6. Lift the front printhead cover.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.89
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 9
7. Release the screws holding one paste deflector allowing it to drop into
contact with the screen.
8. Insert a 0.25mm feeler between the deflector and the screen. Tighten the
screws checking that the 0.25mm gap remains.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for the other deflector.
10. Lower the front printhead cover.
11. Press the System button.
12. Select Continue (F1).
Continue
1.90 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 9
13. After the squeegee has moved approximately 20mm, select Stop Cycle (F2).
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead Adjust
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste Inspect
14. Lift the front printhead cover.
15. Check the deflectors are not touching the screen.
16. Lower the front printhead cover.
17. Press the System button.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.91
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STAGE 9
18. Select Continue (F1).
Continue
19. Repeat Steps 5 - 18 for the other squeegee.
20. The printer operates continuously. The menu bar displays the following
options, these may be selected at any time during a print run:
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead Adjust
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste Inspect
End Run Selecting this option stops the printer on completion of the current print cycle.
Stop Cycle Selecting this option stops the printer immediately, halting all actions.
Paste Load Selecting this option allows the operator to load paste to the screen either
manually or automatically.
Clean Screen Selecting this option allows the operator to clean the screen in addition to the
programmed cleaning intervals.
Adjust Selecting this option allows the operator to adjust any of the main process
parameters displayed on the pop-up menu without having to access the main
menu or stop the machine.
The machine continues to run using the existing values, when Exit (F8) is
selected the new values are used.
To save the new values, select Setup (F6), select Edit Data (F3), select Save
(F2), select Exit (F8).
Knead Paste Selecting this option runs the knead paste process in addition to the programmed
cleaning intervals.
Adjust Inspect Selecting this option allows the operator to edit 2D inspection parameters.
NOTE
Global Limits, Limit Sets and Sit parameters can be edited. Site Co-ordinates
can not be adjusted. Any changes made to inspection parameters are saved on
exit.
1.92 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
MENU PARAMETERS
Each product has a set of parameters which are unique to that particular product
and which need to be setup to obtain acceptable printing results. These
parameters are listed below with a definition of each as an aid to machine setup.
NOTE
Machines have the ability to read product files generated by a DEK 288 printer.
Parameter Definition
Product Name The file name for the particular product. The name can consist of up to eight
alphanumeric characters with no punctuation.
Product ID The product ID is a parameter that allows a descripton of the product. This string may be
up to 32 characters long, but only the first 20 characters are displayed.
Board Length This parameter is used to set the default values for the board stop position in the X
direction, and the paste dispensing area. The maximum value depends on the type of
screen selected.
Min. Allowable 50mm (see Note 1.)
Max. Allowable
265 508mm (see Notes 1. and 2.)
255 460mm
249 430mm
Fuji 460mm
Sanyo 420mm
Heraeus 344mm
In increments of 0.1mm
NOTE
1. With remote board stop fitted
Min. Allowable 130mm
Max. Allowable 508mm (see Note 2.)
2. With the large board option the Max. Allowable is 620mm.
Although the maximum parameter is 620mm boards of 644mm can be
loaded.
Board Width This parameter sets the rail width for this particular product. It is also used to set a
default value for the print stroke, the clean screen, the board stop position in the Y
direction, and the AutoFlex rows. The maximum value depends on the screen type
selected.
Min. Allowable 50mm
Max. Allowable
265 508mm
255 432mm
249 330mm
Fuji 460mm
Sanyo 284mm
Heraeus 344mm
In increments of 0.1mm
NOTE
With remote board stop fitted
Min. Allowable 119mm
Max. Allowable 508.5mm
Board Thickness This parameter is used by the machine to set correct vision and print heights.
Minimum 0.20mm
Maximum 6.00mm
Increments 0.1mm
Underside Clearance This parameter determines the clearance provided between the underside of the board and
the top of the machine tooling to allow for components on the underside of the board.
Minimum 3mm
Maximum 42mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 19mm
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.93
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Tooling Type This determines which type of board support is to be used with this particular product.
Options are:
Vac for Flex, AutoFlex, Vacuum, Magnetic Pillars (see Tooling)
Flatten Vacuum Delay This parameter determines the duration of vacuum applied whilst the board is pressed
against the underside of the screen with Vac for Flex enabled.
Minimum 0 sec
Maximum 5 secs
Default 2 secs
Increment 0.1 sec
Separation Vacuum This parameter determines the duration of vacuum applied after printing and before the
Delay rising table is lowered to separation height with Vac for Flex enabled.
Minimum 0 sec
Maximum 5 secs
Default 2 secs
Increment 0.1 sec
Print Front Limit This determines the distance from the front edge of the board that printing must start.
Minimum -6.5mm
Maximum Board width - print rear limit
Increment 0.1mm
Default 0mm
NOTE
With Paste Trails enabled or ProFlow fitted the minium value is 0mm.
Print Rear Limit This determines the distance from the rear edge of the board that printing must start.
Minimum -6.5mm
Maximum Board width - print front limit
Increment 0.1mm
Default 0mm
NOTE
With Paste Trails enabled or ProFlow fitted the minium value is 0mm.
Board Stop X This parameter determines the distance from the centre line of the machine to the board
stop position.
Minimum 0mm
Maximum 255mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default Half of the board length set in the board
file, (board located centrally)
NOTE
Not used while remote board stop is fitted.
Board Stop Y This parameter determines the distance from the fixed rail to the board stop position.
Minimum 25mm
Maximum Board width minus 15mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default Two thirds of the board width
NOTE
Not used while remote board stop is fitted.
Remote Board This parameter determines the displacement of the remote board stop from the camera
Stop X reference position.
Minimum Minimum Board Length ÷ 2
Maximum Board Length
Increment 0.1
Default Board Length ÷ 2
NOTE
Only used while remote board stop is fitted.
1.94 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Right Feed Delay This parameter sets a time delay on the board stop to allow for irregular shaped boards
when fed from the right.
Minimum 0sec
Maximum 3secs
Increments 0.1sec steps
NOTE
Not used while remote board stop is fitted.
Alignment Weighting This is only used in 2 fiducial mode and sets a value determining how much of the
fiducial spacing error is assigned to fiducial 2.
Minimum 0%
Maximum 100%
Increment 1%
Default 50% (see vision system)
X Align Weighting This is only used in 3 fiducial mode and sets a value determining where the X axis
alignment should be optimized.
Minimum 0%
Maximum 100%
Increment 1%
Default 50% (see vision system)
Y Align Weighting This is only used in 3 fiducial mode and sets a value determining where the Y axis
alignment should be optimized.
Minimum 0%
Maximum 100%
Increment 1%
Default 50% (see vision system)
Alignment Mode This parameter determines the mode used for board to screen alignment. The Non Vision
option is only available from the configuration file. Options available are:
2 fiducial; 3 fiducial.
Default 2 fiducial
Fiducial 1 X coordinate Distance of first fiducial from the right or left hand edge of the board (configuration
dependent).
Minimum 1mm
Maximum Board Length
Increment 0.1mm
Default 1mm
Fiducial 1 Y coordinate Distance of the first fiducial from the front edge of the board.
Minimum 1mm
Maximum Board Width
Increment 0.1mm
Default 1mm
Fiducial 2 X coordinate Distance of second fiducial from the right or left hand edge of the board (configuration
dependent).
Minimum 1mm
Maximum Board Length
Increment 0.1mm
Default 1mm
Fiducial 2 Y coordinate Distance of the second fiducial from the front edge of the board.
Minimum 1mm
Maximum Board Width
Increment 0.1mm
Default 1mm
Fiducial 3 X coordinate Distance of third fiducial from the right or left hand edge of the board (configuration
dependent).
Minimum 1mm
Maximum Board Length
Increment 0.1mm
Default 1mm
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.95
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Fiducial 3 Y coordinate Distance of the third fiducial from the front edge of the board.
Minimum 1mm
Maximum Board Width
Increment 0.1mm
Default 1mm
Select Mark X Distance of the select mark from the right or left hand edge of the board (configuration
dependent).
Minimum 0mm
Maximum Board Length
Increment 0.1mm
Default 148.5mm
NOTE
Only used while Selective Print/Pass is enabled in Set Preferences.
Select Mark Y Distance of the select mark from the front edge of the board.
Minimum 0mm
Maximum Board Width
Increment 0.1mm
Default 13mm
NOTE
Only used while Selective Print/Pass is enabled in Set Preferences.
Board 1 Fiducial Type This determines the type of model to be used for this fiducial. Options are Circle;
Rectangle; Diamond; Triangle; Double Square; Cross; Video model. (see vision system)
Board 2 Fiducial Type This determines the type of model to be used for this fiducial. Options are Circle;
Rectangle; Diamond; Triangle; Double Square; Cross; Video model. (see vision system)
Board 3 Fiducial Type This determines the type of model to be used for this fiducial. Options are Circle;
Rectangle; Diamond; Triangle; Double Square; Cross; Video model. (see vision system)
Select Mark Type This determines the type of model to be used on the board for the select mark. Options
are Circle; Rectangle; Diamond; Triangle; Double Square; Cross; Video model. (see
vision system)
NOTE
Only used while Selective Print/Pass is enabled in Set Preferences.
Screen 1 Fiducial Type This determines the type of model to be used for this fiducial. Options are Circle;
Rectangle; Diamond; Triangle; Double Square; Cross; Video model. (see vision system)
Screen 2 Fiducial Type This determines the type of model to be used for this fiducial. Options are Circle;
Rectangle; Diamond; Triangle; Double Square; Cross; Video model. (see vision system)
Screen 3 Fiducial Type This determines the type of model to be used for this fiducial. Options are Circle;
Rectangle; Diamond; Triangle; Double Square; Cross; Video model. (see vision system)
Screen Image The position of the image in the screen frame. Options available are EDGE justified and
CENTRE Justified. Edge justified only is permitted for Sanyo and Fuji frames.
NOTE
This parameter is not displayed, if Screen Size in Set Preferences has been selected to
Screen Library.
Custom Screen This option allows user definable screen image positions. Selection of this parameter
activates the Print Area Length, Print Area Width and Distance To Image. Options are:
ENABLED; DISABLED
NOTE
This parameter is not displayed, if Screen Size in Set Preferences has been selected to
Screen Library.
Distance To Image The meaning of this parameter varies, depending on whether an image is centre or edge
justified. For centre justified images, the dimension is the distance from the outside rear
of the screen frame to the centre of the image. For edge justified images, the dimension
is the distance from the outside rear of the screen frame to the front edge of the board.
NOTE
This parameter field only appears if Custom Screen has been selected.
Minimum 306mm
Maximum 645mm
Increments 0.1mm
1.96 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Print Area Length This is the maximum printable distance in the Y direction, ie the maximum distance the
squeegee can travel, front to back.
NOTE
This parameter field only appears if Custom Screen has been selected.
Minimum 100mm
Maximum 508.5mm
Increments 0.1mm
Print Area Width This is the maximum length of squeegee that could be fitted to the printer, taking into
account screen frame and the amount of mesh surrounding the mask. This is also the
maximum length of paste that can be dispensed.
NOTE
This parameter field only appears if Custom Screen has been selected.
Minimum 100mm
Maximum 510mm
Increments 0.1mm
Screen Adapter The type of screen adapter needed, if any, for the screen to be used for this product.
NOTE
This parameter is not displayed, if Screen Size in Set Preferences has been selected to
Screen Library.
Options available are NONE, 255, SANYO, HERAEUS, 20 X 20 and
12 X 12.
Forward X offset Programmable offset of the print on the board when printing from the rear. A positive
offset moves the print to the right of the board.
Minimum -1.0mm
Maximum +1.0mm
Increment 0.004mm
Forward Y offset Programmable offset of the print on the board when printing from the rear. A positive
offset moves the print to the rear of the board.
Minimum -1.0mm
Maximum +1.0mm
Increment 0.004mm
Forward q offset Programmable offset of the print on the board when printing from the rear. A positive
offset moves the print in a clockwise direction.
Minimum -1000 arc seconds
Maximum +1000 arc seconds
Increment 2 arc seconds
Reverse X offset Programmable offset of the print on the board when printing from the front. A positive
offset moves the print to the right of the board.
Minimum -1.0mm
Maximum +1.0mm
Increment 0.004mm
Reverse Y offset Programmable offset of the print on the board when printing from the front. A positive
offset moves the print to the rear of the board.
Minimum -1.0mm
Maximum +1.0mm
Increment 0.004mm
Reverse q offset Programmable offset of the print on the board when printing from the front. A positive
offset moves the print in a clockwise direction.
Minimum -1000 arc seconds
Maximum +1000 arc seconds
Increment 2 arc seconds
Print Mode This parameter sets the mode of operation of the machine. Available modes are:
PRINT/PRINT, PRINT/FLOOD, FLOOD/PRINT, ADHESIVE.
The default is PRINT/PRINT.
Selecting Adhesive from this parameter opens the separation delay and print vacuum
mode.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.97
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Front Print Speed This parameter sets the speed across the screen when printing.
Minimum 2mm/sec
Maximum 150mm/sec
Increments 1mm/sec
Default 10mm/sec
Rear Print Speed This parameter sets the speed across the screen when printing.
Minimum 2mm/sec
Maximum 150mm/sec
Increments 1mm/sec
Default 10mm/sec
Front Pressure This parameter sets the force applied by the front squeegee during its print stroke.
Minimum 0kg
Maximum 20Kg
Increments 0.2Kg
Rear Pressure This parameter sets the force applied by the rear squeegee during its print stroke.
Minimum 0kg
Maximum 20Kg
Increments 0.2Kg
Print Gap This parameter sets the gap required between the screen and board to be printed during
the print stroke.
Minimum 0mm
Maximum 6mm
Increments 0.025mm
Knead Off-image This parameter sets whether ProFlow is to knead in an off-image area of the stencil.
Options are:
Enabled; Disabled
Default Enabled
Knead Before Printing This parameter sets ProFlow to knead before printing the first board and the amount of
boards to be printed between kneading.
Minimum 0 (disables knead before printing)
Maximum 100
Increment 1
Default 0
NOTE
This parameter is only displayed, if knead off-image is set to enabled.
Stencil Protection This parameter sets whether tooling to support the stencil, outside the board and clamp
envelopes, is in use. Options are:
Not Fitted; Fitted
Default Fitted
NOTE
This parameter is only displayed while ProFlow is fitted.
Separation Speed This parameter sets the speed at which the first 3mm of separation of board and screen
occurs.
Minimum 0.1mm/sec
Maximum 20mm/sec
Increments 0.1mm/sec
Separation Distance This parameter sets the separation distance between board and screen. The parameter can
help increase cycle time when a low separation speed is used by decreasing the
separation distance.
Minimum 0.0mm
Maximum 3.0mm
Increments 0.1mm
Default 3.0mm
Separation Delay This parameter is the time in seconds that the table delays before lowering. This delay
occurs during screen cleaning and after the flood. This parameter only becomes available
when Adhesive has been selected in the Print Mode parameter.
Print Deposits This parameter sets the number of consecutive print strokes carried out on one substrate.
Select 1, 2 or 3
Default 1
1.98 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
ProFlow Cassette This parameter sets the size of the transfer head used by the ProFlow unit. Size may be
one of the following:
300mm
400mm
500mm
NOTE
For 350mm and 450mm transfer heads, set to 400mm and 500mm respectively.
ProFlow System Pressure This is the amount of print pressure (downward force) applied onto the stencil by the
ProFlow unit.
Maximum 20Kg
Minimum 0kg
Increments 0.2Kg
Default 0
ProFlow Paste Pressure This is the pressure applied to paste in the ProFlow unit while kneading and printing.
Maximum 4 bar
Minimum 0.2 bar
Increments 0.2 bar
Default 2 bar
NOTE
For 350mm and 450mm transfer heads, set to 400mm and 500mm respectively.
ProFlow Idle Pressure This is the pressure applied to paste in the ProFlow unit between kneading and printing,
and between print strokes.
Maximum 4 bar
Minimum 0 bar
Increments 0.2 bar
Default 0.4 bar
NOTE
For 350mm and 450mm transfer heads, set to 400mm and 500mm respectively.
Flood Speed This parameter sets the flood blade speed across the screen when performing a flood
stroke.
Minimum 10mm/sec
Maximum 150mm/sec
Increments 1mm/sec
Flood Height This parameter sets the height of the flood blade above the screen during a flood stroke.
Minimum 0mm
Maximum 5mm
Increments 0.02mm
Dwell Height The parameter allows the user to set the squeegee dwell height. Setting of a lower height
helps the media to stay evenly spread across the length of the squeegee when a less
viscous media is used. Setting a high height allows viewing of the paste roll.
Minimum 5mm
Maximum 40mm
Increment 1mm
Default 30mm
Dwell Speed This preference adjusts the speed at which the squeegee moves to dwell height. A slower
speed helps to reduce the spreading of a less viscous media, ie flux. It should be noted
that decreasing this speed causes the cycle time to increase.
Minimum 10mm/sec
Maximum 30mm/sec
Increment 1mm/sec
Default 24mm/sec
Screen Clean Mode 1 This parameter sets the mode of operation of the screen cleaner for the first clean mode.
(Including Vacuum) When selected this parameter opens a window that allows a screen clean option sequence
to be chosen. The sequence includes six stages, each of which may be one of the
following cleaning operations:
WET, DRY, VAC, NONE
A warning is given if the end stroke is wet.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.99
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Screen Clean Rate 1 This parameter sets the number of print cycles between the cycling of the screen cleaner
for the first screen clean rate.
Minimum 0 (Screen cleaner off)
Maximum 200
Increment 1
Screen Clean Mode 2 This parameter sets the mode of operation of the screen cleaner for the second clean
(Including Vacuum) mode. When selected this parameter opens a window that allows a screen clean option
sequence to be chosen. The sequence includes six stages, each of which may be one of
the following cleaning operations:
WET, DRY, VAC, NONE
A warning is given if the end stroke is wet.
Clean Screen Rate 2 This parameter sets the number of print cycles between the cycling of the screen cleaner
for the second screen clean rate.
Minimum 0 (Screen cleaner off)
Maximum 200
Increment 1
Print Vacuum mode This parameter determines the state of the vacuum during the print and flood stages of
the cycle. The parameter is only available if Adhesive has been selected in the Print
Mode parameter.
ON, OFF
Dry Clean Speed This parameter sets the speed of the screen clean dry wipe for optimization on the Blue
USC and the speed of the screen clean return stroke on the Vortex USC.
Minimum 10 mm/sec
Maximum 120mm/sec
Default 30mm/sec
Increments 1mm/sec steps
Wet Clean Speed This parameter sets the speed of the screen clean wet wipe for optimization.
Minimum 10 mm/sec
Maximum 100mm/sec
Increments 1mm/sec steps
Vac Clean Speed This parameter sets the speed of the screen clean Vacuum for optimization.
Minimum 10 mm/sec
Maximum 100mm/sec
Increments 1mm/sec steps
Clean After Downtime This function provides the facility for the screen to be cleaned automatically with a
preprogrammed clean after a preprogrammed idle time. Clean After Downtime only
becomes active after the machine has performed at least one print after it is powered up.
When selected this parameter opens a window that allows a clean after knead option
sequence to be chosen. The sequence includes six stages, each of which may be one of
the following cleaning operations:
WET, DRY, VAC, NONE
Clean After The Automatic screen clean after downtime process chosen in the above menu parameter
is carried out after a countdown of the number of minutes set in this parameter.
Minimum 5 mins.
Maximum 120 mins.
Increment 1 min.
Clean After Knead This function is active if the machine is running in automatic mode. If this option is
enabled and a paste dispense has been performed (either MANUAL or AUTOMATIC) a
paste knead is performed as defined by the paste knead parameters in the board file on
the next board immediately following the paste dispense. When selected this parameter
opens a window that allows a clean after knead option sequence to be chosen. The
sequence includes six stages, each of which may be one of the following cleaning
operations:
WET, DRY, VAC, NONE
Front Start Offset This parameter determines the distance from the front edge of the board that the cleaning
(Blue USC) stroke must start.
Minimum 0mm
Maximum 60mm
Increments 1mm
1.100 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Front Start Offset The distance, in from the front edge of the board, at which the cleaner is to finish.
(Vortex USC) Minimum -60mm
Maximum 60mm
Default 30mm
Increment 1mm
Rear Start Offset This parameter determines the distance from the rear edge of the board that cleaning must
(Blue USC) complete.
Minimum 0mm
Maximum 60mm
Increments 1mm
Rear Start Offset The distance, in from the rear edge of the board, at which the cleaner is to start.
(Vortex USC) Minimum -60mm
Maximum 60mm
Default 30mm
Increment 1mm
Vortex Cassette Life This parameter sets the number of cleaning strokes that are applied before a cleaning
(Vortex USC) cassette is replaced.
Minimum 0
Maximum 200
Default 20
Increment 1
Vortex Clean Rate This parameter sets the frequency (in print cycles) at which screen cleaning occurs.
(Vortex USC) Minimum 0
Maximum 200
Default 0
Increment 1
Vortex Solvent Rate This parameter sets the frequency (in cleaning cycles) at which solvent is dispensed.
(Vortex USC) Minimum 1
Maximum 10
Default 1
Increment 1
Vortex Vacuum Start The distance, in from the front edge of the board, where vacuum is applied.
(Vortex USC) Minimum Vacuum Stop
Maximum Board Width
Default 0mm
Increment 1mm
Vortex Vacuum Stop The distance, in from the front edge of the board, where vacuum application is stopped.
(Vortex USC) Minimum -100mm
Maximum Vacuum Stop
Default 0mm
Increment 1mm
Vortex Vacuum Rate This parameter sets the frequency (in cleaning cycles) at which vacuum is applied.
(Vortex USC) Minimum 1
Maximum 10
Default 1
Increment 1
Vortex Vacuum Period This parameter sets the period for which vacuum is applied.
(Vortex USC) Minimum 1 sec
Maximum 10 secs
Default 5 secs
Increment 1 sec
Paste Dispense Rate This parameter sets the number of print cycles which occur between cycling of the paste
dispense system.
Minimum 0 (Dispenser switched off)
Maximum 100
Increment 1
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.101
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Paste Dispense Speed This parameter sets the speed at which the paste dispenser moves across the screen
thereby determining the amount of paste deposited on the screen.
Minimum 10mm/sec
Maximum 100mm/sec
Increment 1mm/sec
Paste Start This parameter determines start position of the paste dispense measured from the centre
line of the machine. The limits depend on the type of screen fitted.
Minimum
No adapter -255mm
255 -230mm
Sanyo -210mm
Heraeus -172mm
249 -215mm
Default -half the board length
Maximum
No adapter +255mm
255 +230mm
Sanyo +210mm
Heraeus +172mm
249 +215mm
Default +half the board length
Paste stop This parameter determines the stop position of the paste dispense measured from the
centre line of the machine. The maximum value depends on the type of screen fitted.
Minimum
No adapter -255mm
255 -230mm
Sanyo -210mm
Heraeus -172mm
249 -215mm
Default -half the board length
Maximum
No adapter +255mm
255 +230mm
Sanyo +210mm
Heraeus +172mm
249 +215mm
Default +half the board length
Knead Boards This parameter sets the number of boards to be printed using the knead sequence.
Minimum 1
Maximum 10
Increment 1
Knead Deposits This parameter sets the number of print strokes to be carried out on each of the kneaded
boards.
Minimum 2
Maximum 20
Increment 1
Paste Knead Period This parameter sets the time period between print cycles which, if exceeded, initiates a
paste knead sequence.
Minimum 0 (paste kneading switched off)
Maximum 30 minutes
Increment 1 minute
Knead After Dispense If this option is enabled and a paste dispense has been performed (either Manual or
Automatic) a paste knead is performed (as defined by the paste knead parameters in the
board file) on the next board immediately following the paste dispense.
ENABLED; DISABLED
Paste While Clean This parameter enables the machine to carry out a paste dispense while cleaning the
screen. Available modes are:
DISABLED, MODE 1, MODE 2, BOTH MODES
1.102 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Alternate Disp This parameter gives the option to dispense at either ENDS or CENTRE. ENDS
dispenses at the outer 25% of the squeegees. CENTRE dispenses along an area of 25%
either side of the centre line.
ENDS; CENTRE
Alternate Disp Rate This parameter enables the user to select the ratio of alternate dispenses to standard
dispenses.
No alternate dispense
Every dispense
Every second dispense etc.
Paste With Board This parameter gives the option to dispense paste with a board loaded and held at print
height. This prevents paste dropping through the image on the screen. Options are:
ENABLED; DISABLED
NOTE
With enabled selected the parameter Paste While Clean is removed.
Board Count This function provides the facility for the print cycle to be halted automatically on a
board count basis. If the board stop count is zero this function is not active. When a
print run is started, a count is made from the STOP CYCLE AFTER value to zero
decrementing by one for each board printed. When the counter reaches zero, the print
cycle is finished and control returned to the main display page and the beacon is set to
amber, thus indicating that the machine requires operator attention. The operator has
access to all of the machines options. Once the operator has performed any required
operations, the run button can be pressed to continue the print cycle.
Minimum 0 Boards
Maximum 500 Boards
Increments 1 Board
Stop After Idle This parameter when enabled sets the time the product is held in contact with the screen
until both upline and downline systems are ready to transfer.
Minimum 0 mins.
Maximum 200 mins.
Increments 1 min.
Screen X Forward Nominal position of the X front screen actuator which ensures that corresponding screen
and board fiducials can be viewed from a single camera position.
Minimum -20mm
Maximum +20mm
Increment 0.004mm
Screen X Rear Nominal position of the X rear screen actuator which ensures that corresponding screen
and board fiducials can be viewed from a single camera position.
Minimum -20mm
Maximum +20mm
Increment 0.004mm
Screen Y Axis Nominal position of the Y screen actuator which ensures that corresponding screen and
board fiducials can be viewed from a single camera position.
Minimum -10mm
Maximum +10mm
Increment 0.004mm
SPC Configuration This preference allows the user to set up the Machines SPC operation. On selecting the
SPC Configuration by pressing the Incr. or Decr. buttons, a window opens and the menu
bar changes.
See the SPC Configuration section later in this chapter for further details.
Image Detail This parameter allows the user to modify the screen image data of the selected screen
library file. Once selected, pressing Incr. or Decr. Keys opens the Image Detail
Configuration page.
NOTE
This parameter is only displayed, if Screen Size in Set Preferences has been selected to
Screen Library.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.103
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Mesh Front This parameter sets the distance between the inner edge of the screen frame and the
screen glue line at the front of the frame. It defines the area that should not be contacted
by the squeegees/ProFlow.
Minimum 0mm
Maximum Screen Length - 250mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 38mm
Mesh Rear This parameter sets the distance between the inner edge of the screen frame and the
screen glue line at the rear of the frame. It defines the area that should not be contacted
by the squeegees/ProFlow.
Minimum 0mm
Maximum Screen Length - 250mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 38mm
Mesh Left This parameter sets the distance between the inner edge of the screen frame and the
screen glue line at the left of the frame. It defines the area that should not be contacted
by the squeegees/ProFlow.
Mimimum 0mm
Maximum Screen Width - 250mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 38mm
Mesh Right This parameter sets the distance between the inner edge of the screen frame and the
screen glue line at the right of the frame. It defines the area that should not be contacted
by the squeegees/ProFlow.
Minimum 0mm
Maximum Screen Width - 250mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 38mm
Image X This parameter defines the dimension in the X axis from the right inner edge of the
screen frame to either:
Right hand edge of the image - right justified image
Left hand edge of the image - left justified image
Centre line of the image - centre justified image
Minimum 60mm
Maximum Screen Width - 100mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 330.4mm
Image Y This parameter defines the dimension in the Y axis from the front inner edge of the
screen frame to either:
Front edge of the image - front justified image
Rear edge of the image - rear justified image
Centre line of the image - centre justified image.
Minimum 60mm
Maximum Screen Width - 100mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 330.4mm
Image X Justification This parameter defines the position of the image about the Image X parameter. The
image can be left, right or centre justified about Image X. Options are:
Left; Right; Centre.
Default Centre
Image Y Justification This parameter defines the position of the image about the Image Y parameter. The
image can be front, rear or centre justified about Image Y. Options are:
Front; Rear; Centre.
Default Centre
1.104 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Barcode Y This parameter defines the dimension between the centre of the barcode to the outer rear
edge of the screen frame or adaptor.
Minimum 10mm
Maximum Screen Length - 10mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 97mm
Paste Ridge This parameter enables the cleaning option Paste Ridge Removal. This option removes
Removal the ridge of paste that can delevop on the underside of the screen at the end of the under
screen cleaner stroke.
Disabled; Enabled.
Default Disabled
Front Knead Speed This parameter sets the speed of kneading in the forward direction
Minimum 2mm/sec
Maximum 150mm/sec
Increment 1mm/sec
Default 10mm/sec
Rear Knead Speed This parameter sets the speed of kneading in the rearward direction.
Minimum 2mm/sec
Maximum 150mm/sec
Increment 1mm/sec
Default 10mm/sec
Front Knead Pressure This parameter sets the pressure to be applied, while using squeegees, when kneading in
the forward direction.
Minimum 0kg
Maximum 20kg
Increment 0.2kg
Default 5kg
Rear Knead Pressure This parameter sets the pressure to be applied, while using squeegees, when kneading in
the rearward direction.
Minimum 0kg
Maximum 20kg
Increment 0.2kg
Default 5kg
ProFlow Knead Pressure This parameter sets the pressure to be applied, while using ProFlow, when kneading in
either direction.
Minimum 0kg
Maximum 20kg
Increment 0.2kg
Default 10kg
Paste Recovery Rate This parameter sets the frequency, measured in print strokes completed in either
direction, at which paste roll recovery occurs in both directions, when using squeegees.
Minimum 0 (This disables paste roll recovery)
Maximum 500
Increment 1
Default 1
Front Paste Recovery This parameter sets the extent of paste roll recovery movement while begining the
rearward print stroke. The movement is measured forward from the print stroke start
position.
Minimum 0mm
Maximum 15mm (Subject to the front turnaround envelope)
Increment 1mm
Default 5mm
Rear Paste Recovery This parameter sets the extent of paste rol recovery movement while begining the
forward print stroke. The movement is measured rearward from the print stroke start
position.
Minimum 0mm
Maximum 15mm (Subject to the rear turnaround envelope)
Increment 1mm
Default 5mm
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.105
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Tooling Deviation This parameter sets the extent of tooling deviation before a warning message is posted.
Minimum 0%
Maximum 50%
Increment 0.25%
Default 20%
1.106 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
SPC CONFIGURATION
SPC CONFIGURATION
When the cursor on the Edit Current Process Parameters page highlights the SPC
Configuration option and Incr. or Decr. are pressed an SPC Configuration
Window opens and two extra menu options become available:
Edit Edit Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Outputs Limits
Configuration The configuration window allows the user to setup the Machines SPC operation.
Window
SPC Configuration Page.
DATA OUTPUT RATE EVERY CYCLE
START RATE 1 cycles
SAMPLE RATE 10 cycles
START RATE LIMIT 10 cycles
SPC DATA MODE NONE
SPC FORMAT WINDOWS
UPDATE ON START-UP NO
ALIGN INSPECT MODE PRE PRINT
Data Output Rate Two rates of data output are available as follows:
Every Cycle - Outputs SPC data every cycle except for the camera data, which is
output dependant upon the settings of the parameters start rate, sample rate and
start rate limit.
On Inspect - Outputs all SPC data at a rate dependant upon the settings of the
parameters start rate, sample rate and start rate limit.
Start Rate Sets the initial SPC output rate, for setting up a line. If start rate is set to 10, SPC
data is output every 10 cycles until the start rate limit is reached, when the rate
becomes that set in the sample rate parameter. The range is 1-100.
Sample Rate Sets the rate of SPC output after the start rate limit has been reached. The range
is 0-100, where 0 = use start rate until start rate limit is reached. If sample rate is
set to 15, SPC data is output every 15 cycles after the start rate limit is reached.
Start Rate Limit Sets the amount of SPC output cycles at the start rate. When this limit is reached
the sample rate parameter becomes the active SPC output rate. The range is
0-100, where 0 = continuous SPC output at the start rate.
NOTE
Setting both start rate limit and sample rate to zero causes continuous SPC
output at the start rate.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.107
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
SPC CONFIGURATION
SPC Data Mode Three modes of data transfer are available as follows:
None - No SPC data is output at any time.
Remote - The data is written to a file called [Link] located on a
remote network drive.
Disc - The data is written to a file called [Link] located on the
machines local drive.
SPC Format All data irrespective of SPC data mode is in the selected SPC format, options are:
DOS or Windows.
Update on Start-up The windows format contains the header data which has all the display
information for the real time plots, including nominals, tolerances and control
limits. The DOS format does not contain this header data. Two options are
available as follows:
Yes - Use if SPC format is set to DOS, header data is sent on start up.
No - Use if SPC format is set to windows.
Align Inspect Mode Four modes of alignment inspection are available as follows:
None - No fiducial alignment information is output at any time.
Pre Print - Board and screen fiducial alignment information is taken before the
board is printed.
Post Print - Board and screen fiducial alignment information is taken after the
board is printed.
Pre + Post Print - Board and screen fiducial alignment information is taken
before and after the board is printed.
The Next and Previous keys are used to move through the parameters.
The Incr. and Decr. keys change the parameter values.
Selecting the Edit Outputs key opens an SPC Output Parameters window and
allows the user to decide which SPC parameters are output to the SPC data file
[Link] (see the SPC Output Parameters section).
The Edit Limits key opens an Edit SPC Limits window (see the Edit SPC Limits
section), the window gives the operator the ability to set nominal, minimum and
maximum limits for the various SPC parameters and define whether the machine
stops when a limit is exceeded.
1.108 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
SPC CONFIGURATION
SPC Output Pressing the Edit Outputs key while SPC Configuration Page is displayed
Parameters opens the following window and menu bar:
SPC OUTPUT PARAMETERS
X Alignment Deviation YES
Y Alignment Deviation YES
Theta Alignment Deviation YES
Board Stretch YES
Front Pressure YES
Rear Pressure YES
Separation Speed YES
Temperature YES
Relative Humidity YES
Cycle Time YES
Table Position YES
Board Fiducial 1 Score YES
Screen Fiducial 1 Score YES
Board Fiducial 2 Score YES
...more
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
The Next and Previous keys move the cursor vertically through the parameter
list.
The Incr. and Decr. keys switch the setting between YES and NO. If a
parameter is set to YES it is output to the SPC data file ([Link]).
The Exit key returns to the previous menu.
The SPC Output parameters and their descriptions are listed in the table below:
Name Description
X Alignment Deviation (mm) The residual misalignment of board to stencil obtained by post print
inspection. This data is obtained prior to releasing screen or board
Y Alignment Deviation (mm) clamps.
Theta Alignment Deviation (arcsec.)
Board Stretch (mm) The calculated stretch of the board relative to the screen.
Calculated from fiducial data obtained by post print inspection.
Front Pressure (kg) Average front squeegee print pressure.
Rear Pressure (kg) Average rear squeegee print pressure.
Separation Speed (mm/s) Table separation speed.
Temperature (deg.C) Temperature
Relative Humidity (%RH) Relative humidity.
Cycle Time (sec.) Time from receipt of board upline to release to downline, ie actual
processing time and not line heartbeat.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.109
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
SPC CONFIGURATION
Name Description
Table Position (mm) Values from the last print cycle. This value is the Set Print Height,
which is stored in the machine configuration/calibration file, less the
distance the table has travelled up to the print position.
Board Fiducial n Score For the fiducial outputs nnn will refer to the target score and –mmm
will be the accept score - target score.
Screen Fiducial n Score
X Pre Alignment Deviation (mm) The residual misalignment of board to stencil obtained by pre-print
inspection. This data is obtained after screen clamping.
Y Pre Alignment Deviation (mm)
Theta Pre Align Deviation (arcsec.)
Pre Print Board Stretch (mm) The calculated stretch of the board relative to the screen.
Calculated from fiducial data obtained during pre-print inspection
(obtained after screen clamping).
Pre Fid 1 X Align Deviation (mm) Pre-print fiducial 1 X location error.
Post Fid 1 X Align Deviation (mm) Post print fiducial 1 X location error.
Pre Fid 1 Y Align Deviation (mm) Pre-print fiducial 1 Y location error.
Post Fid 1 Y Align Deviation (mm) Post print fiducial 1 Y location error.
Pre Fid 2 X Align Deviation (mm) Pre-print fiducial 2 X location error.
Post Fid 2 X Align Deviation (mm) Post print fiducial 2 X location error.
Pre Fid 2 Y Align Deviation (mm) Pre-print fiducial 2 Y location error.
Post Fid 2 Y Align Deviation (mm) Post print fiducial 2 Y location error.
Pre Fid 3 X Align Deviation (mm) Pre-print fiducial 3 X location error.
Post Fid 3 X Align Deviation (mm) Post print fiducial 3 X location error.
Pre Fid 3 Y Align Deviation (mm) Pre-print fiducial 3 Y location error.
Post Fid 3 Y Align Deviation (mm) Post print fiducial 3 Y location error.
Front X Act Rel Movement (mm) Front X actuator relative movement between current and last cycle.
Rear X Act Rel Movement (mm) Rear X actuator relative movement between current and last cycle.
Act Y Rel Movement (mm) Y actuator relative movement between current and last cycle.
Front X Act Position (mm) Front X actuator absolute position.
Rear X Act Position (mm) Rear X actuator absolute position.
Act Y Position (mm) Y actuator absolute position.
PVP Result (%) The paste volume prediction for a limit set.
Front Print Speed (mm/s The print carriage speed when printing to the front.
Rear Print Speed (mm/s) The print carriage speed when printing to the rear.
1.110 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
SPC CONFIGURATION
Edit SPC Limits Pressing the Edit Limits key when SPC Configuration Page is displayed opens
the following window and menu bar:
EDIT SPC LIMITS
Parameter Stop On Maximum Minimum Nominal
Limit Limit Limit
X Alignment Deviation NO +0.025 -0.025 0.000
Y Alignment Deviation NO +0.025 -0.025 0.000
Theta Alignment Deviation NO +27 -27 0
Board Stretch NO +0.10 -0.10 0.00
Front Pressure NO +0.2 -0.2 0.0
Rear Pressure NO +0.2 -0.2 0.0
Separation Speed NO +2.00 -2.00 1.0
Temperature NO +5 -5 22
Relative Humidity NO +25 -25 50
Cycle Time NO +2.0 -2.0 30.0
Table Position NO +0.4 -0.4 0.000
Board Fiducial 1 Score NO +375 +100 700
Left Right Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
NOTE
The shaded parameters in the window are set by the machine.
Each parameter can be set to stop the machine if the limits are exceeded.
The Left and Right keys move the cursor across the parameter columns.
The Next and Previous keys move the cursor vertically through the parameter
list.
The Incr. and Decr. keys increase or decrease the highlighted parameter.
The Exit key returns to the previous menu.
The SPC parameters and their edit limits are listed in the table below:
Parameter Nominal Default Increment Tolerance
Tolerances Size Range
X Alignment Deviation 0 ± 0.025mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Y Alignment Deviation 0 ± 0.025mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Theta Alignment Deviation 0 ± 31 arcsec 1 arcsec ± 100 arcsec
Board Stretch 0 ± 0.1mm 0.01mm ± 1mm
Front Pressure Product Parameter ± 0.2 kg 0.01 kg ± 2 kg
Rear Pressure Product Parameter ± 0.2 kg 0.01 kg ± 2 kg
Separation Speed Product Parameter ± 0.5mm 0.25mm ± 5mm
Temperature 22 ± 5 degrees 1 degree ± 10 degrees
Relative Humidity 50 ± 25 % 1% ± 50 %
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.111
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
SPC CONFIGURATION
Parameter Nominal Default Increment Tolerance
Tolerances Size Range
Cycle Time 30 ± 2 seconds 0.1 seconds ± 10 seconds
Table Position Product Parameter ± 0.2mm 0.025mm ± 1mm
(print gap)
Board Fiducial 1 Score 700 +375, +100 10 ± 500
Screen Fiducial 1 Score 700 +375, +100 10 ± 500
Board Fiducial 2 Score 700 +375, +100 10 ± 500
Screen Fiducial 2 Score 700 +375, +100 10 ± 500
Board Fiducial 3 Score 700 +375, +100 10 ± 500
Screen Fiducial 3 Score 700 +375, +100 10 ± 500
X Pre Alignment Deviation 0 ± 0.025mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Y Pre Alignment Deviation 0 ± 0.025mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Theta Pre Alignment Deviation 0 ± 27 arcsec 1 arcsec ± 100 arcsec
Pre Print Board stretch 0 ± 0.1mm 0.01mm ± 1mm
Pre Fid 1 X Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Post Fid 1 X Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Pre Fid 1 Y Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Post Fid 1 Y Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Pre Fid 2 X Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Post Fid 2 X Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Pre Fid 2 Y Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Post Fid 2 Y Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Pre Fid 3 X Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Post Fid 3 X Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Pre Fid 3 Y Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Post Fid 3 Y Align Deviation 0 ± 0.0625mm 0.0005mm ± 1mm
Front X Act Rel Movement 0 ± 0.45mm 0.025mm ± 2mm
Rear X Act Rel Movement 0 ± 0.85mm 0.025mm ± 2mm
Act Y Rel Movement 0 ± 0.25 0.025mm ± 2mm
Front X Act Position Front X Rough ± 0.45mm 0.025mm ± 9mm
Align Value
Rear X Act Position Rear X Rough ± 0.85mm 0.025mm ± 9mm
Align Value
Act Y Position Y Rough Align ± 0.25mm 0.025mm ± 9mm
Value
PVP Result 80 ± 20 % 5% ± 50 %
Front Print Speed Product Parameter ± 0.5mm 0.25mm ± 5mm
Rear Print Speed Product Parameter ± 0.5mm 0.25mm ± 5mm
1.112 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STATUS PAGE
STATUS PAGE The information displayed on the main control screen is shown on the status
page. There are two versions of the status page, selectable in Display Type in
Set Prefs menu.
Display Type 1
Display Type 2
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.113
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STATUS PAGE
Information Three information windows are displayed on the status page as follows:
Windows
• Printer - Status (on Display Types 1 and 2)
• Process - Parameters (on Display Types 1 and 2)
• Rates (on Display Type 2 only)
Printer - Status The following table lists all the items that can be displayed in the Printer - Status
information panel:
Items Description
Status The printers current status is displayed. Options are:
Maintenance; Operator Active; Ready; Machine Set Up.
Mode Displays the current mode of operation of the printer. Options are:
Step - The printer operates one step at a time;
Auto - The printer operates continuously;
Single - The printer prints a single board;
No Print - The printer passes the board through the printer without printing.
Batch Count Displays the amount of boards printed from the current batch. This is only shown
on Display Type 1.
Batch Limit Displays the total amount of boards to be printed in the current batch. This is only
shown on Display Type 1.
Operator Displays the name of the operator currently logged on to the printer.
Product Displays the current product loaded onto the printer.
Data Logging Displays whether data logging is selected. When selected, a pressure. dat file is
created as the squeegee carries out a print stroke. This option is selected in Test
Cycles in the Maint. menu.
Host Comms Displays the condition of host communications. Options are:
Disabled - Host Comms not selected;
Enabled-No Comm - Host Comms selected, but not connected;
Enabled-Comm - Host Comms selected and connected.
Temperature Displays the current temperature within the printhead area. This is only displayed
if a temperature and humidity sensor is fitted.
Humidity Displays the current relative humidity within the printhead area. This is only
displayed if a temperature and humidity sensor is fitted.
Cycle Time The first figure displays the cycle time of the last board to be printed. The second
figure displays the average cycle time of the batch. Cycle time is the time taken
for the board to pass from the input sensor to the output sensor, not including
delays, ie waiting for the downline machine.
Throughput The first figure displays the throughput time of the last board to be printed. The
second figure displays the amount of boards to be printed in an hour, based on the
throughput times of the batch. Throughput is the time taken for the board to pass
from the input sensor to the output sensor, including all delays.
SW Version Displays the version of software currently loaded on the printer.
The Printer - Status panel can display up to a maximum of 14 items, (on both
Display Types 1 and 2).
1.114 User Manual Software Version 6
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STATUS PAGE
Process - Parameters The following table lists all the items that can be displayed in the Process -
Parameters information panel:
Print Mode Front Print Speed Rear Print Speed Front Pressure
Rear Pressure ProFlow System Pressure Print Gap Separation Speed
Paste Dispense Rate Clean Screen Rate 1.2 Forward X Offset Forward Y Offset
Forward q Offset Reverse X Offset Reverse Y Offset Reverse q Offset
The values of the Process - Parameters are set in the product file of the loaded
product.
The panel can display up to a maximum of 14 items on Display Type 1 and 6
items on Display Type 2.
Rates The following table lists all the items that can be displayed in the Rates
information panel:
Items Description
Batch Count/Limit The first figure displays the amount of boards printed in the current batch. The
second figure displays the total amount of boards to be printed in the current batch.
The batch count limit is set in Batch Limit in the Monitor menu.
Board Count/Limit The first figure displays the amount of boards printed in the current board count.
The second figure displays the total amount of boards to be printed in the current
board count. The board count limit is set in Board Count in the Edit Data menu.
The board count limit allows a separate board count to be set within the total batch
count.
Paste Disp. Cnt/Rate The first figure displays the amount of boards printed since the last paste dispense.
The second figure displays the amount of boards to be printed between each paste
dispense. The paste dispense count/rate is set in Paste Dispense Rate in the Edit
Data menu.
Clean 1 Count/Rate The first figure displays the amount of boards printed since the last screen clean
mode 1 was carried out. The second figure displays the amount of boards to be
printed between each screen clean mode 1. The clean 1 count/rate is set in Screen
Clean Rate 1 in the Edit Data menu. This parameter is only displayed while a
blue or silver under screen cleaner is fitted.
Clean 2 Count/Rate The first figure displays the amount of boards printed since the last screen clean
mode 2 was carried out. The second figure displays the amount of boards to be
printed between each screen clean mode 2. The clean 2 count/rate is set in Screen
Clean Rate 2 in the Edit Data menu. This parameter is only displayed while a
blue or silver under screen cleaner is fitted.
Vortex Stroke/Limit The first figure displays the amount of cleaning strokes carried out since the
Vortex cleaning cassette was replaced. The second figure displays the total
amount of cleaning strokes to be carried out before the cleaning cassette needs
replacing. The Vortex stroke/limit is set in Vortex Cassette Life in the Edit Data
menu. This parameter is only displayed while a Vortex under screen cleaner is
fitted.
Clean Count/Rate The first figure displays the amount of boards printed since the last Vortex screen
clean was carried out. The second figure displays the amount of boards to be
printed between each Vortex screen clean. The clean count/rate is set in Vortex
Clean Rate in the Edit Data menu. This parameter is only displayed while a
Vortex under screen cleaner is fitted.
Print Direction Displays the print direction for the next board to be printed.
The Rates panel can display up to a maximum of 6 items and is only shown on
Display Type 2.
Software Version 6 User Manual 1.115
MACHINE PROGRAMMING
STATUS PAGE
1.116 User Manual Software Version 6
CHAPTER 2
SET PREFERENCES
SET PREFERENCES
INTRODUCTION
SET PREFERENCES
INTRODUCTION The Set Preferences function allows for the setting of preferred machine control
options.
To access the set preferences window proceed as follows:
Select the Maint. Button.
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
Select the Set Prefs button.
Calibrat Calibrat Calibrat House Set Diagnost Test Exit
Pressure Offset Vision Keeping Prefs Cycles
The set preferences window is displayed:
Set Preferences
TRANSPORT MODE LEFT TO LEFT
MACHINE UNITS Metric
UPLINE PROTOCOL NO FMI
DOWNLINE PROTOCOL NO FMI
TRANSFER PERIOD 20 secs
COMMS PROTOCOL NO COMMS
EVENT RECORDING GROUP 3
TOOLING HARDWARE MAGNETIC
FIDUCIAL REFERENCE LEFT
2D INSPECTION ENABLED
PFLOW CONTACT POS. 0.0 mm
PRESSURE H/W FITTED
CHANGE MODE OPTION MANUAL
SCREEN SIZE 265
..more
The menu bar changes to give the following options:
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Next and Previous move the highlight between the various parameters. Incr.
and Decr. alter the value of the highlighted parameter.
Software Version 6 User Manual 2.1
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
Data File Locations Allows the user to create individual directories for product and data files. Once
created the individual directories become the current locations for all future
product and data files.
Before changing the product and data file locations, use the copy data function in
House Keeping, to copy any existing product and data files to floppy disk. After
changing the product and data file locations, use the copy data function in House
Keeping, to copy any existing product and data files from the floppy disk to the
new directories.
NOTE
When Load Data is selected from the setup menu only the files in the current
location are displayed.
The default location is:
D:\Program Files\DEK\MachineControl\Printer
Selecting the Incr. or Decr. key with data file locations highlighted opens the
following window:
File Locations
Product Directory:
Data Directory:
The menu bar changes to the following:
Browse Restore Next Previous Exit
Default
NOTE
Restore default is only available while the highlighted directory is not already at
the default location.
Use the Next and Previous keys to move between the different directories.
Use the Exit key to close the File Locations window.
Use the Restore Default key to change the path, for files associated with the
highlighted directory, from the current location to the default location.
Selecting the Browse key opens the following window:
Directory Structure On Drive
..
Current Directory Location
D:\Program Files\DEK\MachineControl\Printer
2.2 User Manual Software Version 6
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
The menu bar changes to the following:
Select Create Left Right Up Down Exit
Directory
The message ‘Select a directory to become the current location for Process
Program files.’ is displayed in the message bar.
Use the Up and Down keys to scroll up and down the highlighted column.
Use the Left and Right keys to move between columns.
Use the Exit key to close the Directory Structure On Drive window.
Selecting the Create Directory key opens the following window:
Create Directory
New Name:
The menu bar changes to the following:
Proceed Cancel
Use the keyboard to type the name of the new directory.
Select the Proceed key, a new directory is created providing:
• The string entered constitutes a valid name for a directory.
• A file or directory of that name does not already exist.
• The current directory is accessible for writing.
Transport Mode Sets the input and output side of the printer, options are:
Left to Right; Right to Left; Right to Right, Left to Left, No Transfer
The default is Left to Right.
Machine Units Sets the unit of measurement, options are:
Metric; Imperial units
The default is Metric.
Upline Protocol Sets the protocol for transferring boards from adjacent machines, options are:
No FMI; MIU; Manual
The default is specified by customers requirement.
Software Version 6 User Manual 2.3
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
Downline Protocol Sets the protocol for transferring boards to adjacent machines, options are:
No FMI; MIU; Manual
The default is specified by customers requirement.
Transfer Period Sets a programmable time period used by certain transfer protocols, options are:
Min 0 sec
Max 99 sec
Increments 1 sec
The default is 20 seconds.
Period of Transfer Time - This is the period of time which the machine allows for
a transfer of a board before displaying a ‘Board Transfer Error’ for upline or
downline.
Period of Waiting Time - This is the period of time which the machine allows
when waiting for the upline or downline machine to request a board for transfer
before displaying a message of ‘Waiting for Upline/Downline’.
Selective Print/Pass Sets whether the facility to selective print or pass through a board is to be used,
options are:
Enabled; Disabled
The default is Disabled
This feature is protected by Feature Licence Authenication.
When enabled the identity of the incoming board is checked using a separate
fiducial on the board only, called a Select Mark. If the identity of the board
matches the current product file the board is printed. If the board is different or
cannot be recognized, it is passed through without printing.
Paste Dispense Sets the position from which paste is dispensed, in relation to the screen image,
Position options are:
Front; Rear; Auto
The default is Auto.
When exiting set preferences after setting option to either Rear or Auto the
following window is displayed:
Paste Dispense Position
Please confirm that there will be no obstruction
when your paste dispenser dispenses paste at the
rear of the image
2.4 User Manual Software Version 6
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
Comms Protocol Sets the communications protocol to be used for serial communications to a host
computer, options are:
GEM; Net_File; No Comms
The menu bar changes depending on the option chosen, see the Host
Communications Chapter for further details.
WARNING
HOST COMMUNICATIONS. BE AWARE THAT IF THE MACHINE
S A F E T Y L O C K S A R E D E F E AT E D W H I L S T H O S T
COMMUNICATIONS ARE ACTIVE, A DANGER EXISTS WHEREBY
MACHINE PARTS MAY MOVE UNEXPECTEDLY.
Event Recording Sets which events are recorded in the event log file, options are:
Custom; Group 3; Group 2; Group 1
Over 200 possible events may be recorded.
On selecting Custom the following set up window opens:
Event Report Setting: Disk Host Grp
System Power on on off 1
System Power down on off 1
Humidity on off 1
Temperature on off 1
Batch Count on off 1
on off 1
Measured Cycle Time
on off 1
Throughput Cycle Time on off 1
Front Print Pressure on off 1
Rear Print Pressure on off 1
Print Speed on off 1
Table Separation Speed on off 1
Stretch Error on off 1
X error on off 1
Y error on off 1
...more
The window displays how each event is logged in three possible ways; Disk,
Host and Grp.
Disk This column lists which events are logged to the disk file. The events set to ‘on’
are logged, those set to ‘off’ are not logged.
Software Version 6 User Manual 2.5
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
Host This column lists which events are sent to the host computer. The option is only
active if a GEM host comms interface is fitted. The events set to ‘on’ are logged,
those set to ‘off’ are not. How the host computer deals with the event logging,
depends on the host software and is not controlled by the machine.
Grp This column lists the group an event is assigned. The user can select which of the
groups are to be recorded, as follows:
Set Preference Selection Event Groups Recorded
Group 1 Groups 1, 2 and 3 (all events)
Group 2 Groups 2 and 3
Group 3 Group 3
Setting Up Events The Event Recording menu is laid out as follows:
Toggle Left Right Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Use the Next and Previous keys to move to the event to be changed.
Use the Toggle key to toggle the Disk and Host parameters between on and off.
Use the Left and Right keys to move to the Disk, Host or Grp columns.
Use the Incr. and Decr. keys to change the value of the Grp parameter.
Use Exit to leave the Event Recording window.
Recordable Events The following tables show the events that can be selected for recording:
System Power On System Power Down Humidity
Temperature Batch Count Measured Cycle Time
Throughput Cycle Time Front Print Pressure Rear Print Presure
Table Separation Speed Stretch Error X Error
Y Error Theta Error Board Fid 1 Score
Board Fid 2 Score Board Fid 3 Score Screen Fid 1 Score
Screen Fid 2 Score Screen Fid 3 Score ProFlow System Pressure
Pneumatic Power Down Front Squeegee Error Rear Squeegee Error
Rising Table Error Print Carriage Error Paste Carriage Error
Camera X Axis Error Camera Y Axis Error Rail Width Error
Screen XF error Screen XR Error Screen Y Error
Paste Cartridge Tilt Error Screen Changer Drive Error Board Stop Stuck
Board Clamp Stuck Board Stuck In Rails Unable To Find Fiducial
Rail Lifted Error Pressure Error File Error
Unable To Recover Recovery Started Recovered
Upline Transfer Error Downline Transfer Error Dual Shuttle Fault
2.6 User Manual Software Version 6
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
Screen Elevator Comms Fault Screen Elevator Fault Screen Changer Fault
Lid Bolt Fault Alignment Out Of Range Line Power On
Line Power Off Cover Open Cover Closed
Printer Ready Head Raised Head Closed
Paste Dispensing Paste Cartridge Empty Cycle Aborted
Cycle Completed Cleaning Screen Parameter Adjusted
Setup Started Product Loaded New Product
Product Data Changed Screen Unloaded Screen Loaded
Tool Change Started Tool Change Complete Setup Ended
Start Print Cycle Board Received End Print Cycle
Printed Board Ready Board Printed Operator Log On
Operator Log Off Clear Batch Count Start Maintenance
End Maintenance Pressure Recalibrated Offset Recalibrated
XY Scale Recalibrated Theta Recalibrated Configuration Changed
Start Diagnostics End Diagnostics Flood Height Reset
Camera Ref Reset Thickness Recalibrated Vision Height Reset
Print Height Reset Autoflex Status Reset Software Updated
New Event Log Front Reference Position Reset Front Reference Height Reset
Rear Reference Height Reset Check Cleaner Paper Cleaner Solvent Low
Barcode Read Failure Barcode Mismatch Screen Couplings Not Extended
Mint Reply Timeout Camera X Failed To Position Camera Y Failed To Position
Aperture Blockage Stencil Smear Paste Present
Bridging alarm Alignment Alarm Head Left Partly Open
Head Moved To Safe State Inspection Cycle Complete Clock Change Request
Clock Changed Board Delivered and Removed Event Log Disc File Full
ProFlow Error Autoflex Tooling Selected Autoflex Tooling Deselected
AutoFlex Tooling Enabled AutoFlex Tooling Disabled Tooling Data Has Been Changed
CAN Node Comms Lost. Node CAN Node Comms Active. Node CAN Bus Comms Lost. Bus
CAN Bus Comms Active. Bus Invalid CAN Response Product Directory Request
Current Product Request Erase Product Request Rename Product Request
Load Product Request Download Product Request Upload Product Request
Download Configuration Request Upload Configuration Request Upload Management Data Request
Clear Batch Data Request Clear Session Data Request Upload Event Log Request
Clear Event Log Request Comms Start Request Comms Stop Request
Update Mode Request Comms Error Parameter Info Uploaded
Formatted Parameters Uploaded Formatted Parameters Downloaded Comms Status Request
Comms Rebuild Product List Comms Adjust Paste Rate Comms Adjust Front Pressure
Comms Adjust Rear Pressure Comms Adjust Print Gap Comms Adjust Seperation Speed
Comms Adjust Clean Screen Comms Adjust FWD_X Offset Comms Adjust FWD_Y Offset
Comms Adjust FWD_T Offset Comms Adjust REV_X Offset Comms Adjust REV_Y Offset
Comms Adjust REV_T Offset Comms Dispense Paste Request Comms Clean Screen Request
Comms Enabled Comms Disabled Equipment Constant Change
Acknowledge Terminal Message Comms Knead Paste Request Comms Condition Paste Request
Control State Change To Local Control State change To Offline Control State Change To Remote
GEM Spooling Activated Gem Spooling Deactivated GEM Spool Transmission Failure
Software Version 6 User Manual 2.7
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
Operator Command Issued Remote Barcode Received Comms Adjust ProFlow Pressure
[Link] file Attribute Error Volume Alarm Evaluation Dongle Detected
Valid Dongle Detected Dongle Error Dongle Changed
Print Speed Front Print Speed Rear Print Speed
Comms Adjust Print Speed Comms Adjust Front Print Speed Comms Adjust Rear Print Speed
Vortex Cassette Replaced Maintenance Monitoring Initialis The Monthly Service is Due
The Six Monthly Service is Due The Yearly Service is Due Equipment Recovery
Equipment Setup Equipment Ready Equipment Maintenance
Equipment Waiting Equipment Running Equipment Down
Tooling Hardware Sets which type of tooling is fitted, options are:
AutoFlex; Vacuum; Magnetic; Vac for Flex
Fiducial Reference Sets whether the fiducial co-ordinates are specified relative to the front/left or
front/right corner of the board, options are:
Left; Right
2D Inspection Sets whether the 2D inspection facility is to be used, options are:
Enabled; Disabled
2Di Movement Used to determine whether camera movement is to be tuneable. While the value
Tuning is other than zero; the camera, upon arrival at an inspection site, is allowed to
settle for the period set before proceeding with acquisition and inspection.
Minimum 0 milliseconds
Maximum 250 milliseconds
Default 250 milliseconds
Increment 50 milliseconds
Screen Size Sets the screen size frame, options are:
265; Fuji; 249; Sanyo; Screen Library
With Screen Library enabled the printer is provided with detailed screen
dimensional information from a ‘read only’ library. This information is stored
within the machine configuration and product files.
Once selected in Set Preferences, detailed frame dimensions are provided to the
printer. In Edit Current Parameters, the parameter Image Data provides
comprehensive location and mesh details to the printer.
2.8 User Manual Software Version 6
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
To enable screen library files carry out the following:
1. Highlight Screen Size in the Set Prefs page.
2. Using Incr. or Decr. select Screen Library.
Edit Data is now available on the menu bar.
3. Select Edit Data, the following window and menu bar is displayed:
Screen Frame Configuration
SCREEN TYPE DEK 265 CENTRAL IMAGE
SCREEN LENGTH XXX mm
SCREEN WIDTH XXX mm
FRAME FRONT XXX mm
FRAME REAR XXX mm
FRAME LEFT XXX mm
FRAME RIGHT XXX mm
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Use Incr. or Decr. to select the required Screen Type. If no valid screen library
files are found, the default file DEK 265 Central Image is displayed.
Use the Next or Previous to select and Incr. or Decr. to modify the screen frame
parameters as required.
The screen library menu parameters are defined in the table below:
Parameter Definition
Screen Record ID The identity of the screen type library record containing a text string that
matches the Screen Type selected.
Format Maximum 32 character text string
Default DEK 265 Central Image
Screen Length This parameter sets overall dimension front to rear of the screen frame or
adaptor.
Minimum 550mm
Maximum 860mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 736.6mm
Screen Width This parameter sets the overall dimension left to right of the screen frame or
adaptor.
Minimum 580mm
Maximum 736.6mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 736.6mm
Frame Front This parameter sets the distance between the outer edge of the screen frame
or adaptor and the inner edge of the frame, at the front of the frame.
Minimum 20mm
Maximum Screen Length - 250mm
Increment 0.1
Default 38.1mm
Software Version 6 User Manual 2.9
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
Frame Rear This parameter sets the distance between the outer edge of the screen frame
or adaptor and the inner edge of the frame, at the rear of the frame.
Minimum 20mm
Maximum Screen Length - 250mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 38.1mm
Frame Left This parameter sets the distance between the outer edge of the screen frame
or adaptor and the inner edge of the frame, at the left of the frame.
Minimum 20mm
Maximum Screen Length - 250mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 38.1mm
Frame Right This parameter sets the distance between the outer edge of the screen frame
or adaptor and the inner edge of the frame, at the right of the frame.
Minimum 20mm
Maximum Screen Length - 250mm
Increment 0.1mm
Default 38.1mm
Consumable Action Sets how the machine reacts to a cleaner paper low, cleaner solvent low, print
medium low or Vortex cleaning cassette expired, options are:
Warn; Pause; Suspend
Warn - A warning window is displayed, but printing proceeds without
interruption. The tricoloured beacon shows amber/green.
Pause - A pause on warning window is displayed and printing is delayed to
enable the user to either; replenish the consumable resource, or defer the
replenishment until later and continue printing. The tricoloured beacon shows
red.
Suspend - A suspend on warning window is displayed and printing is suspended
and remains suspended, until the consumable resource has been replenished.
The tricoloured beacon shows red. Before printing commences the consumable
resources are checked for availability, before allowing the print run to proceed.
Image Recording Sets whether video images can be recorded, options are:
Off; PC Disk; VP Disk
The default is Off.
PCdisk requires the PC to have 8Mb ram & VPdisk requires a SCSI disk to be
attached to the VP.
Under Screen Sets whether or not the vacuum option is fitted to the machine, options are:
Cleaner
Vacuum; Standard
The default is Standard.
If standard is selected the vacuum options are removed from the screen clean
mode parameters. If Vortex under screen cleaner is fitted, vacuum is the only
option.
To enable the blue under screen cleaner carry out the following:
2.10 User Manual Software Version 6
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
1. Press the function key F10 on the keyboard, the following window is
displayed:
265 HORIZON
Serial Number : 201305
Executable date : March 19 2000
Executable time : [Link]
Executable name : [Link]
Software Version : 05.00
Options Enabled : SBNG
Enter to Close ...
NOTE
If the Vortex under screen cleaner is currently enabled, carry out disabling the
Vortex under screen cleaner.
2. Type bluon using the keyboard.
3. Press Enter, the message ‘Blue Under-Screen Cleaner Enabled’ is
displayed in the message prompt bar.
4. Press Exit.
To disable the blue under screen cleaner carry out the following:
1. Press the function key F10 on the keyboard, a window of the following form
is displayed:
265 HORIZON
Serial Number : 201305
Executable date : March 19 2000
Executable time : [Link]
Executable name : [Link]
Software Version : 05.00
Options Enabled : SBNG
Enter to Close ...
2. Type bluoff using the keyboard.
3. Press Enter, the message ‘Blue Under-Screen Cleaner Disabled’ is
displayed in the message prompt bar.
The silver under screen cleaner becomes the current cleaner and all cleaner
parameters revert to being appropriate to the previous cleaner.
The value of the configuration parameter cleaner type is set to silver and this
parameter is written to the configuration file.
4. Press Exit.
To enable the Vortex under screen cleaner carry out the following:
1. Press the function key F10 on the keyboard, a window of the following form
is displayed:
Software Version 6 User Manual 2.11
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
265 HORIZON
Serial Number : 201305
Executable date : March 19 2000
Executable time : [Link]
Executable name : [Link]
Software Version : 05.00
Options Enabled : SBNG
Enter to Close ...
NOTE
If the blue under screen cleaner is currently enabled, carry out disabling the
blue under screen cleaner first.
2. Type vorton using the keyboard.
3. Press Enter, the message ‘Vortex Under-Screen Cleaner Enabled’ is
displayed in the message prompt bar.
The Vortex under screen cleaner becomes the current cleaner and all cleaner
parameters become appropriate to the Vortex cleaner.
The value of the configuration parameter cleaner type is set to Vortex and
this parameter is written to the configuration file.
4. Press Exit.
To disable the Vortex under screen cleaner carry out the following:
1. Press the function key F10 on the keyboard, a window of the following form
is displayed:
265 HORIZON
Serial Number : 201305
Executable date : March 19 2000
Executable time : [Link]
Executable name : [Link]
Software Version : 05.00
Options Enabled : SBNG
Enter to Close ...
2. Type vortoff using the keyboard.
3. Press Enter, the message ‘Vortex Under-Screen Cleaner Disabled’ is
displayed in the message prompt bar.
The silver under screen cleaner becomes the current cleaner and all cleaner
parameters revert to being appropriate to the previous cleaner.
The value of the configuration parameter cleaner type is set to silver and this
parameter is written to the configuration file.
4. Press Exit.
2.12 User Manual Software Version 6
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
Paste Trails Provides the capability to reduce solder paste trails from squeegees
automatically, options are:
Disabled; Mode 1
If mode 1 is selected, any paste that has dripped from the squeegee is scooped up,
by the squeegee back to the paste roll. This process occurs at the start of every
stroke, with the print mode set to print/print and at the start of only the print
stroke, when the print mode is set to flood/print or print/flood.
Transport Wait This option enables the product to be held in contact with the screen until both
Mode upline and downline systems are ready to transfer, options are:
Standard; Hold_at_Print
The default is Standard.
Clamp Type Sets the type of board clamp used, options are:
Board Clamp; Snuggers
The default is Board Clamps.
To eliminate vacuum seal loss during alignment, if the Snuggers option is
selected and the tooling type is Vacuum, the rails do not dip when the camera is
traversing.
Snugger Thickness This parameter is only available if Snuggers has been selected from the Clamp
Type preference, options are:
Min 0.8mm
Max 2.0mm (2.01mm is displayed but 2.0mm is the maximum value selectable)
Increments 0.1mm
The default is 1.6mm.
Tooling Monitoring This parameter sets, while Feature Licensing asserts that use of Tooling
Deviation Monitoring is authorized, the frequency (in boards printed) at which
monitoring is performed. Monitoring is also carried out on the first print stroke
of a print run.
Min 0 boards (Tooling Monitoring disabled)
Max 200 boards
Increments 1
The default is 0 boards.
This feature only applies while squeegees are fitted.
Software Version 6 User Manual 2.13
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
When a particular print stroke is being monitored, as the squeegee traverses the
image the pressure being applied is measured and recorded. Any variations in
the load being applied, as a result of insufficient tooling support or underside
components coming into contact with the tooling are noted. Upon completion of
the print stroke, the deviation in the pressure applied over the print stroke is
determined and expressed as the tooling deviation. The tooling deviation is
calculated from the minimum and maximum values and expressed as a
percentage. If the tooling deviation exceeds the permitted threshold, as set by
the Tooling Deviation parameter in the product file, a cyclic log text file called
[Link] is written and the following window is displayed:
Excessive Tooling Deviation
Tooling Deviation : 25.08 %
Number of Samples : 81
Check the Board Support.
NOTE
The number of samples is the amount of pressure variations recorded during the
print stroke.
The following menu bar is displayed:
Continue Abort
On selecting Continue printing proceeds until it is interrupted by some other
cause.
On selecting Abort printing is discontinued and the following menu bar is
displayed, to enable the board to be removed from the machine:
Auto Manual Exit
Board Board
If the number of samples (pressure variations) during a print stroke is less than 2
or the minimum value is zero, the error message ‘Failed to determine Tooling
Deviation’ is displayed.
Display Type Sets the type of status page displayed on the monitor, options are:
Type 1; Type 2
The default is Type 1.
2.14 User Manual Software Version 6
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
Fiducial This parameter enables and disables the intelligent fiducial monitoring feature,
Monitoring options are:
Smart; Normal
The default is Normal.
If smart is selected, a set levels menu bar option is available.
Set Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Levels
On pressing the Set Levels key, a window opens as follows:
SMART FIDUCIAL MONITORING
SCORE WARNING LEVEL 500
VAR'N WARNING LEVEL 10
AUTOMATIC RETRY OFF
The Next and Previous keys move the cursor between the three parameters.
The Incr. and Decr. keys increase and decrease the value of the top two
parameters and turn the Automatic Retry On and Off.
The Exit key closes the window and returns to the set preferences window.
The range of values for the three parameters are as follows:
Score Warning Level:
Min 0
Max 500
Var’n Warning Level:
Min 0
Max 500
Automatic Retry:
Off; On
Score Warning During fiducial set up the score achieved after training each fiducial is analyzed.
Level If the score fails to achieve the accept score by more than Score Warning Level,
an instruction box appears recommending the operator check video settings,
fiducial parameters etc.
Var’n Warning While the machine is running, the score for every fiducial located is monitored.
Level If for a given fiducial, the score from one fiducial to the next varies by more than
the Variation Warning Level, but does not fall below the minimum accept score,
a message window is displayed, warning that the score of the screen/board
fiducial is fluctuating. Fiducial relearning is advised if the problem persists.
Software Version 6 User Manual 2.15
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
Fiducial Search The parameter enables an auto search to be selected if a screen fiducial or board
fiducial are not found. The feature also enables a machine to run a product setup
on another machine, options are:
Custom; Disabled
The default is Disabled.
Setup If Custom is selected, an Adjust option becomes available on the menu bar:
Adjust Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
On selecting Adjust from the menu, a Fiducial Search Strategy window opens:
Fiducial Search Strategy
AUTOSEARCH All Boards
WINDOW SIZE 16 mm
The menu bar changes to:
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
The Next and Previous keys move the cursor between the two parameters.
The Incr. and Decr. keys change the value of the highlighted parameter.
The Exit key returns to the set preferences menu.
Autosearch This parameter sets whether an automatic search can be selected following a
Fiducial Not Found Error Message. The options are:
1st Board; All Boards
The option Auto Search (F2) is added to the menu bar as follows:
Retry Auto Fiducial Search Search Abort
Search Setup Step Reset
Depending on the setting, the option Auto Search (F2) is available for the 1st
board or all boards of a batch, following a Fiducial Not Found Error Message.
2.16 User Manual Software Version 6
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
If Auto Search is selected, the machine uses the following strategy to search for
the fiducial. The sequence continues until the fiducial is found:
1. The camera starts in the nominal fiducial position, determined by the product
file.
2. The camera attempts to locate the fiducial within its field of view.
3. The camera stays in position and repeatedly searches for the fiducial, each
time using a different adjustment of the camera lighting.
4. The camera moves to another position in the search window area.
5. If the whole search window area has not been covered, the sequence returns
to Step 2.
6. If the the whole search window area has been covered with no fiducial being
found, the camera moves to the nominal position and an error is generated.
NOTE
If 2D board inspection is enabled on a machine this feature searches for screen
fiducials only.
Window Size This parameter sets the size of the window area that is searched around the
nominal fiducial location.
Local Product File The offset values (differences between the product file and set up of the
machine) are stored locally on the hard disk in an offsets file called [Link]. For
each product file, any offset values required are stored added to the offsets file .
The addition to the offsets file is made when the first board is run and only if
Custom is selected.
Because the product file is not updated other machines are able to share the
product file.
Loading a Product When a product is loaded, if Custom is selected and a corresponding entry in the
offsets file ([Link]) exists, the parameters are read from the offsets file and
added to the corresponding parameters from the product file, the sum of the two
values for each fiducial offset is used as the new parameter. The chase offsets
are calculated for the first board and are saved to the [Link] file.
Actuator Limits If due to the new fiducial positions the actuators are required to go close to their
limits a warning is generated. If the actuator would need to travel beyond its
limit an error is generated and the red beacon is illuminated.
Remote Board Stop Sets whether the remote board stop facility is to be used, options are:
Fitted; Not Fitted
The default is Not Fitted.
Software Version 6 User Manual 2.17
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
Board Stop X Offset This parameter allows for the input of an offset to compensate for variations in
the focal lengths of the vision systems between machines.
Min 20mm
Max 40mm
The default is 28mm.
This parameter has no function while remote board stop is fitted.
SPC Port This preference allows the user to set the configuration of the SPC port output
Configuration rate and data format.
Selecting the Incr. or Decr. buttons whilst this preference is highlighted opens a
further parameter window.
SPC Configuration
BAUD RATE: 9600
WORD LENGTH: 8
PARITY: None
STOP BITS: 1
The menu bar changes to:
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
The Next and Previous keys move the cursor between the parameters.
The Incr. and Decr. keys change the value of the highlighted parameter.
The Exit key returns to the set preferences menu.
The four adjustable parameters have the following ranges:
Parameter Options Default
Baud Rate 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 3600, 4800, 9600, 9600
14400, 19200, 28800, 38400
Word Length 5, 6, 7, 8 8
Parity ODD, EVEN, NONE, MARK, SPACE NONE
Stop Bits 1, 2 1
NOTE
The faster the baud rate the faster information transfer occurs.
SPC data is output when any of the following occur:
• SPC output cycle (as per Output Rate)
• Alignment Inspection Cycle
• 2D Inspection Cycle
2.18 User Manual Software Version 6
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
ProFlow Contact This parameter sets the height of the ProFlow printhead so that it just touches the
Position stencil surface.
Min - 10mm
Max + 10mm
Increments 0.1mm
The Default is 0mm.
Machine Location This allows the operator to enter text to uniquely identify the machine. Output is
via GEM, Host Comms and SPC.
Maint. Monitoring This preference, when enabled, provides an indication to the operator when a
preventive maintenance service is due. Options are:
Enabled; Disabled
When enabled, if Run (F1) is pressed on the menu bar and a service is due, the
amber light on the tricolour beacon is illuminated. The following window is
displayed:
Maintenance Monitor
Monthly service is due
The message in the window varies dependent upon the type of service due. If a
period of one month or 45,000 cycles has elapsed, the message is as shown
above. If a period of six months or 260,000 cycles has elapsed, the message is
‘Six Monthly service is due’. If a period of one year or 520,000 cycles has
elapsed, the message is ‘Yearly service is due’.
The menu bar changes to the following:
Done Defer
The Done key updates the maintenance monitor data file, named [Link], as
follows:
The service cycle counter is reset to zero.
The service number is incremented.
The last service date is reset to the current date.
The warning window is cleared, the amber beacon changes to green and the
printing run commences.
The Defer key does not update the maintenance monitor data file.
The warning window is cleared, the amber beacon changes to green and the
printing run commences. As the file has not been updated, the next time the Run
key is pressed the maintenance monitor window is displayed again. This routine
continues until the Done key is pressed.
Software Version 6 User Manual 2.19
SET PREFERENCES
PREFERENCES
If Maintenance Monitoring is disabled, left disabled for several service periods,
either calender or cycle or both, and enabled again:
The next time Run is pressed, the maintenance monitor software determines how
many service periods have been exceeded. From this information it determines
if any higher order servicing has been missed during the disabled period. If a
higher order service would have become due during the disabled period, that
service message is displayed.
ProFlow Hardware Sets whether ProFlow Hardware is fitted.
Fitted; Not Fitted
Pressure Hardware Sets whether pressure feedback hardware is fitted.
Fitted; Not Fitted
Vacuum Hold Time This parameter introduces a time delay between raising the table to flex print
height and initiating Flatten Vac Delay.
Min - 0.0 sec
Max - 5.0 secs
Increment 0.1 sec.
2.20 User Manual Software Version 6
CHAPTER 3
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
COMMS PROTOCOL OPTIONS
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
COMMS PROTOCOL OPTIONS
GEM This configuration implements the SMEMA standard for communications for
Surface Mount Equipment. GEM (Generic Equipment Model) is a standard
sub-set of the SECSII protocol. GEM is specifically designed for implementing
equipment automation in a production environment.
In this configuration, a host computer running GEM compatible software talks to
the machine via a Network cable.
If the Host is a PC, DEK’s Off-line editor software can be used to modify
product files. The Event Log can be read by a text editor. The flexibility of the
GEM interface allows data collection to be customized to meet the users
requirements.
Net_Files This configuration allows users to redirect files away from the machines local
hard drive to a remote directory on a file server. The machine is configured to
access a ‘product’ directory for a product file and a ‘data’ directory for output
data files.
At the machine when a product file is loaded it is read from the ‘product’
directory on the network file server. When it is saved it is saved to the ‘product’
directory on the file server. Files cannot be read from the printer or sent to the
printer across the network.
Once the files are present on the server, they can be accessed from a networked
PC without interfering with the machine.
At a networked PC, DEK’s Off-line Editor software can be used to modify
product files. QC-Calc software can be used to access SPC data in the
‘[Link]’ file. The Event Log can be read with a text editor.
For details of Comms Protocol Selection see the next section.
Software Version 6 User Manual 3.1
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
COMMS PROTOCOL OPTIONS
Selecting Comms The Comms Protocol Set Preference SECS, GEM, and NET_FILE options each
Protocol Options display additional menu parameters if they are selected in the Set Preferences
window.
On selecting GEM the following menu bar is displayed:
Enable Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Comms
On selecting NET_FILE the following menu bar is displayed:
Enable Edit Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Comms Comms
If the Enable Comms key is pressed the following menu bar is displayed:
Confirm Exit
The user is given the option to Confirm or Exit their selection.
The NET_FILE option may cause a further window to appear requesting the
Network Password.
3.2 User Manual Software Version 6
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
COMMS PROTOCOL OPTIONS
Editing NET_FILE The NET_FILE comms editing window allows the user to change IP addresses,
Comms Options user ID, file paths etc.
To enter the Edit Comms window from the set preferences window, select
NET_FILE from the Comms Protocol set preference and press the Edit Comms
menu bar option.
The Edit Comms window appears as follows:
Network Parameters
Remote Drive C:
User ID
Products Path
Data Path
Auto Login DISABLED
Local Copies DISABLED
Reconnect Period 60
Timeout 30
To edit the Edit Comms window the following menu bar appears:
Edit Next Previous Left Right Exit
The Next and Previous keys are used to move the cursor up and down the
current column.
The Left and Right keys move the cursor between the two parameter columns.
The Edit keys makes the parameter under the cursor editable. When editing a
parameter the cursor keys and the delete keys can be used as well as the normal
alphanumeric keys. While editing a parameter (the cursor is still flashing),
pressing the Exit key finishes the current parameters editing.
The Exit key is used to leave the Edit Comms window.
Software Version 6 User Manual 3.3
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
For a machine to function in a network environment, correct setting of its IP
Address is necessary. The IP Address (Internet Protocol Address) provides a
unique global address for both the machine and the network.
NOTE
IP Addresses must be provided by the sites Line or Network Manager.
TCP/IP Driver Windows NT Network Configuration option can be set up using the Network
(GEM and icon in Control Panel. Select Protocols and highlight TCP/IP Protocol. From
NET_FILES) Properties choose the appropriate adaptor and either obtain or specify a IP
address for the printer.
SDR Driver The IP address of the printer must be set up in the SDR driver. To do this edit the
(GEM Only) SDR configuration file ‘c:\printer\[Link]’ (see next page) using a text
editor. The DOS program EDIT is suitable and can be used by typing the
following from the DOS prompt:
EDIT C:\printer\[Link]
Set the PASSIVE ENTITY IPADDRESS to the printers ‘IP address’.
If there is more than one printer communicating with the GEM Host, set the
DEVICEID differently for each printer. The default value is 0x109 (265).
Alternative DEVICEID values should be chosen within the range
0x0000 - 0x7FFF (0 - 32767).
3.4 User Manual Software Version 6
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
Configuration File /* SDR-DOS-170 Sample Configuration File*/
PORT 0:
PROTOCOL HSMS94
EQUIPMENT
PASSIVE ENTITY
PASSIVE ENTITY IPADDRESS [Link]
PASSIVE ENTITY TCPPORT 5265
T3 30
T5 5
T6 10
T7 5
T8 6
CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT 5
CIRCUIT ASSURANCE 20
TGRACE 15
MEMORY STALL 5
WRITE STALL 7
START
DEVICE 0:
DEVICEID 0x109
PORT 0
START
Definitions of Fields The majority of the fields in the SDR configuration file never need to be
changed. They are described here to give an understanding of how to configure
the driver when changing IP addresses, Device ID’s or some of the timer values.
Port 0: Defines this port as SECS port 0.
Protocol HSMS94 Selects the protocol that the SDR driver uses.
Equipment Defines that the printer end of the link is the equipment end.
Software Version 6 User Manual 3.5
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
Passive Entity Defines that the printer is the passive entity and that the host is expected to
establish the TCP/IP connection. A GEM host is almost always the active entity.
Passive Entity IP Sets the IP address of the printer.
Address
Passive Entity TCP Specifies a TCP Port number at which the passive entity waits for a connection
Port on this HSMS link. Typically a number beginning at 5000.
T3 30 Sets the HSMS-SS T3 reply time-out to 30 seconds. If the printer does not
receive a reply within this time a S9F9 Transaction time-out error message is
transmitted.
T5 5 The HSMS-SS T5 Connect separation Timer value. Only used by an ‘ACTIVE’
entity.
T6 10 The HSMS-SS T6 Control Message Reply Timer value. should be less than T3
10 is a typical value.
T7 5 The HSMS-SS T7 Connect time-out value. The time that the PASSIVE Entity
waits to receive a HSMS [Link] control message after a TCP/IP connection
has been established. If the time is exceeded the TCP/IP link is terminated.
T8 6 The HSMS-SS T8 Inter-character Timer value. The maximum time that SDR
driver waits for a TCP/IP recv operation to complete. If the time is exceeded the
TCP/IP link is terminated.
Connection Only used by an ‘ACTIVE’ entity.
Establishment 5
Circuit Assurance 20 Defines the frequency at which the SDR Driver initiates a HSMS Linktest
control transaction.
T Grace 15 A period during the start up of the link. when the SDR Driver accepts and
buffers messages from the printer software.
Memory Stall 5 This limits how long the SDR Driver tolerates a situation where all of its buffers
are full and the host is attempting to send more data. If the time is exceeded the
TCP/IP link is terminated.
3.6 User Manual Software Version 6
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
Write Stall 7 This limits the amount of time that the SDR driver waits for TCP/IP to accept
data. If the time is exceeded the TCP/IP link is terminated.
Start This statement automatically enables the port when the printer starts up.
Device 0: This defines the printer as device 0.
Device ID 0x109 This allocates an ID to Device 0 (the printer). it is specified as a hexadecimal
number. The default is 0x109 (265 decimal).
Port 0 This defines the port that device 0 uses. In this case Port 0. This refers to the
configuration data previously defined for port 0 above.
Start This statement automatically enables the device when the printer starts up.
Software Version 6 User Manual 3.7
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
HOST COMMS
HOST COMMS The machine provides the user with access to certain Host Comms options
without accessing the maintenance function. The user is able to send and receive
messages to and from the host computer via the Terminal Services option,
upload product data files to the host computer, download product data files from
the host computer and alter the equipment control level.
WARNING
HOST COMMUNICATIONS. BE AWARE THAT IF THE MACHINE
SA F E T Y L O C K S A R E D E F E A T E D W H I L S T H O S T
COMMUNICATIONS ARE ACTIVE, A DANGER EXISTS WHEREBY
MACHINE PARTS MAY MOVE UNEXPECTEDLY.
Terminal Services
Message From When a message is sent to the machine from the Host, the following window is
GEM Host displayed:
Message From GEM Host Message Time: [Link]
Testing host message passing
Select Ack Message to acknowledge the message and close the message
window.
Ack
Message
Accessing Terminal To send and view messages to and from the Host proceed as follows:
Services
1. Select Host Comms.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
2. Select Terminal Services.
Terminal Transfer Transfer On-Line Off-Line Local/ Exit
Services To Host To Equip Remote
3.8 User Manual Software Version 6
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
HOST COMMS
The terminal services message windows are displayed as follows:
Message From GEM Host Message Time: [Link]
Message to GEM Host Message Time: [Link]
_
The most recent message from the Host is displayed in the upper window.
If a new message arrives while the window is open, the upper window displays
the new message and the Ack Message key is visible. Select Ack Message to
acknowledge to the Host that the message has been received.
Ack
Message
3. To send a message to the Host, type the message using the keyboard, the
message appears in the lower window.
4. Select Send Message to send the message in the lower window to the Host.
Send Exit
Message
5. Select Exit.
Exit
Software Version 6 User Manual 3.9
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
HOST COMMS
Upload a To upload a product data file from the Host proceed as follows:
Product Data File
1. Select Host Comms.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
The Host Communications window is displayed as follows:
Host Communications
Communications Protocol GEM
Communications: Enabled-Communications
Equipment Control On-Line
On-Line Control Remote
2. Select Transfer To Host.
Terminal Transfer Transfer On-Line Off-Line Local/ Exit
Services To Host To Equip Remote
The Upload Data File window is displayed as follows:
Upload Data File
CALIBRA
CIRCLE
CROSS
DEFAULT
DEK04
HASH
NEWFILE
NEWFILE2
ODDFILE
SQUARE
TEST
TEST2
TEST3
TRIANGL
3. Using the Left, Right, Up and Down keys, highlight the required data file.
Upload Left Right Up Down Exit
File
3.10 User Manual Software Version 6
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
HOST COMMS
4. Select Upload File, the chosen product data file is transferred to the Host.
Upload Left Right Up Down Exit
File
5. Select Exit.
Upload Left Right Up Down Exit
File
6. Select Exit.
Terminal Transfer Transfer On-Line Off-Line Local/ Exit
Services To Host To Equip Remote
Download a To download a product data file from the Host proceed as follows:
Product Data File
1. Select Host Comms.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
The Host Communications window is displayed as follows:
Host Communications
Communications Protocol GEM
Communications: Enabled-Communications
Equipment Control On-Line
On-Line Control Remote
2. Select Transfer To Equip.
Terminal Transfer Transfer On-Line Off-Line Local/ Exit
Services To Host To Equip Remote
Software Version 6 User Manual 3.11
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
HOST COMMS
The Download Data window is displayed as follows:
Download Data
File Name:
------------------------------
3. Enter the name of the required product data file to download from the Host,
via the keyboard.
4. Select Download, the chosen product data file is transferred from the Host.
Download Exit
5. Select Exit.
Terminal Transfer Transfer On-Line Off-Line Local/ Exit
Services To Host To Equip Remote
Equipment Control To change the equipment control level proceed as follows:
Level
1. Select Host Comms.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
The Host Communications window is displayed as follows:
Host Communications
Communications Protocol GEM
Communications: Enabled-Communications
Equipment Control On-Line
On-Line Control Remote
3.12 User Manual Software Version 6
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
HOST COMMS
2. Select the required equipment control level from the three options:
On-Line, Off-Line or Local/Remote.
Terminal Transfer Transfer On-Line Off-Line Local/ Exit
Services To Host To Equip Remote
3. Select Exit.
Terminal Transfer Transfer On-Line Off-Line Local/ Exit
Services To Host To Equip Remote
4. Select Exit.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
Software Version 6 User Manual 3.13
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
HOST COMMS
3.14 User Manual Software Version 6
CHAPTER 4
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR MESSAGES
INTRODUCTION
ERROR MESSAGES
INTRODUCTION If for any reason the machine does not complete a particular sequence in the time
allowed for in software, an error condition arises. The relevant error message is
displayed on the main control screen.
Machine Errors are detected by sensors specifically designed for checking
correct machine status (System Power, Pneumatic Power, etc.) or by functions
failing to achieve their correct operation. These latter errors are either detected
by a limit sensor being operated or by setting a time limit for their completion.
The time limits are set so they are 1.5 times the longest possible time taken for
that particular operation, after which, if not completed, an error is reported on the
main control screen.
When an error occurs the relevant message is displayed on the main control
screen. The displayed error message is accompanied by information regarding
the possible causes and the corrective action to be taken.
The Tricolour beacon changes to red and records the error in the Event Log file.
Software Version 6 User Manual 4.1
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR RECOVERY
ERROR RECOVERY
When an error message is displayed the following options maybe available to
recover the machine:
Abort Pressing this option re-initializes the entire printer, ejecting any product that may
be in the printer and returning to the main control page.
Retry Selecting this option re-checks the error condition and if clear continues the print
cycle.
Recover Pressing this option attempts to continue with any cycle that is in operation. This
function sets modules (paste dispenser, print carriage, etc.) to their home
position and ejects the board that is currently in the printer without re-initializing
the machine. This option should be the first to be operated if there is an error
reported.
Diagnostics This option enables the diagnostics to be entered immediately, normally by a
technician, for more in-depth investigation of the problem.
Open Cover This option allows the operator to select Change Screen to gain access to the
tooling area of the machine.
Continue When this option is available, selecting the continue key clears the error message
and continue with the cycle that is in operation.
Fiducial Setup When this option is available, selecting the Fiducial Setup key allows the user to
relearn the reported ‘Not Found’ fiducial.
Auto Search When this option is available, selecting the Auto Search key instigates a search
within the selected window size to locate the ‘Not Found’ fiducial.
Search Step When this option is available, selecting the Search Step key moves the camera
the first step in a search procedure designed to locate the ‘Not Found’ fiducial.
Further selection of the key moves the camera to the second step etc. Once the
fiducial is visible in the region of interest, the Retry key can be selected to
capture the fiducial.
Search Reset When this option is available, selecting the Search Reset key returns the camera
to its original position, before the Search Step key was selected. This is the
position from which the ‘Not Found’ fiducial was reported.
4.2 User Manual Software Version 6
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR MESSAGE LISTING
ERROR MESSAGE LISTING
Error Message Interpretation
Alignment Out of Range This indicates that the actuator positions required to achieve
a satisfactory alignment are not attainable.
Alignment Close to Actuator limit exceeded.
Limit/Out of Range
AutoFlex Timed Out This error reports that with AutoFlex tooling on high power
and the tooling pins up, the process time of 5 minutes has
been exceeded. When this message is displayed the power
is also switched to low.
Board Detected At Board With the machine running in any mode, this error reports
Stop, Print Terminated. that the board stop sensor has been activated out of
sequence.
Possible causes are:
Board already loaded into the machine.
Sensor is detecting tooling.
Sensor is faulty.
Board Fiducial Not Found This error reports that the vision system has been unable to
locate the board fiducial.
Board Not Over Input This error reports a machine has started without a board on
Sensor the rails. The user has ignored the message to place a board
on the rails and selects continue on the machine.
Board On Rails, Remove This error reports that a board has been sensed on the rails
and Continue during one of the following operations:
Initialization
Loading a new board file
Entering the rail system in diagnostics.
Board Stop Not Lowered This error reports that the board stop is up and has not
lowered within the time-out period of 3 seconds. The
possible causes are: Board stop sensor - enter Diagnostics
and check the sensor changes state.
Air pressure failure to the board stop.
Board Stop Not Retracted This error reports that the board stop is down and has not
retracted within the time-out period of 3 seconds. A
possible cause is:
Board stop sensor - enter Diagnostics, Digital Inputs and
check the sensor changes state.
Board Stop Stuck This error reports that the board stop, which is housed in
the camera assembly has failed to lower or retract.
Board Stuck in Rails This error reports that the board has failed to either reach
the board stop or exit the machine after being printed.
Camera X Axis Error This error reports that the camera carriage has failed to
reach its home position in the X axis.
Camera Y Axis Error This error reports that the camera carriage has failed to
reach its home position in the Y axis.
Command Timed Out This error reports if a board on the belt fails to move over
(Belt Motors) the board at left/right sensor within the time period.
Possible causes are:
Home sensor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor not running.
NextMove card faulty.
Software Version 6 User Manual 4.3
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR MESSAGE LISTING
Error Message Interpretation
Command Timed Out This error reports that the camera has failed to move to the
(Camera Axes) demanded position within the time period. This error
applies to both the X and Y camera axis. Possible causes
are:
Home sensor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor not running.
NextMove card faulty.
Command Timed Out This error reports that the paste dispense carriage has failed
(Paste Dispense Carriage) to move to the demanded position within the time period.
Possible causes are:
Home sensor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor not running.
NextMove card faulty.
Command Timed Out This error reports that the print carriage has failed to move
(Print Carriage) to the demanded position within the time period. Possible
causes are:
Home sensor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor not running.
NextMove card faulty.
Command Timed Out This error reports that the proflow unit has failed to move to
(Proflow) the demanded position within the time period. Possible
causes are:
Home sensor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor not running.
NextMove card faulty.
Command Timed Out This error reports that the moving rail has failed to move to
(Rail System) the demanded position within the time period. Possible
causes are:
Home sensor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor not running.
NextMove card faulty.
Command Timed Out This error reports that the actuator has failed to move to the
(Screen Actuators) demanded position within the time period. Possible causes
are:
Home sensor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor not running.
NextMove card faulty.
Command Timed Out This error reports that the front/rear squeegee has failed to
(Front/Rear Squeegee) move to the demanded position within the time period.
Possible causes are:
Home sensor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor fault, if occurring during initialization.
Motor not running.
NextMove card faulty.
Downline Board Transfer This error reports that the time the downline interface has
Fault waited for a board has exceeded the time-out.
Downline Machine Not This error reports that the downline machine is unavailable
Available to accept the next board.
Event File Open Error This error reports that there was a problem opening the
event log backup file.
4.4 User Manual Software Version 6
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR MESSAGE LISTING
Error Message Interpretation
Failed to Determine This error reports that while monitoring the tooling
Tooling Deviation deviation, the number of samples (pressure variations)
during the print stroke was less than 2 or the minimum
value was zero. This error message is only valid where
tooling deviation is authorized and enabled.
Check tooling support is sufficient.
Check underside components are clear of tooling.
Front Squeegee Error This error reports that the front squeegee has failed to reach
its fully up position.
Front Squeegee Pressure When this error is detected a new window displays the set
Error pressure reading and the actual pressure reading.
File Error This message appears if there is an error writing or reading
a 265 file.
Have All Tooling Pins This message appears for the user to confirm that all
Been Removed ? magnetic tooling pins have been removed, before setting up
the machine for a new board file that uses AutoFlex tooling.
Invalid Calibration Data. This error reports that the ProFlow calibration data is
Recalibrate ProFlow corrupt or invalid.
Heights
Invalid Calibration Data. This error reports that the squeegee calibration data is
Recalibrate Squeegee corrupt or invalid.
Heights
Lid Bolt Fault This indicates that the lid bolt has failed to either open or
close.
No Paste Knead Cycles This error reports when Knead Paste is selected on main
Selected menu page and Knead Deposits in Set Prefs is selected to 0
cycles.
Paste Carriage Error This error reports that the paste carriage has failed to reach
its home position.
Paste Cartridge Tilt Error This error reports that the paste cartridge mechanism has
failed to either make its up or down limit switches.
Pneumatic Power Down This error message reports that the pneumatic supply is
either too low or has been disconnected.
Position Error This error reports that the cameras actual position is not
(Camera) within the tolerance of 1% of the designated position.
Position Error This error reports the print carriage actual position is not
(Print Carriage) within tolerance of its designated position.
Position Error This error reports that the rising table has failed to reach its
(Rising Table) home position.
Print Carriage Error This error reports that the print carriage has failed to move.
Proflow Downstop At This error reports when the downstop reaches set limits
Limit whilst using the jog buttons in Diagnostics, Drive
Downstop Using Jog Buttons.
Proflow at Movement This error reports when the proflow reaches set limits
Limit whilst using jog buttons in Diagnostics, Drive System
Using Jog Buttons.
Software Version 6 User Manual 4.5
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR MESSAGE LISTING
Error Message Interpretation
Rail Lifted Error, Check This error reports that either the left rail lifted sensor or the
Tooling right rail lifted sensor are out of their home positions when
any of the following moves are taking place:
Alignment of the screen
Board stop moving into position
Initialization of the machine
Initialization of the AutoFlex tooling
Possible causes are:
A misfed board
Tooling/object on the rising table striking the underside of
the rails
Rear Squeegee Error This error reports that the rear squeegee failed to reach its
fully up position.
Rear Squeegee Pressure When this error is detected a new window displays the set
Error pressure reading and the actual pressure reading.
Rising Table Error This error reports that the rising table has either failed to
reach its fully down position or that when attempting to
reach the required height during the machine cycle did not
achieve the positional accuracy.
Rising Table Out of This error reports that either; the camera axes are not at the
Position home position when the rising table is to be lifted, or the
rising table is at a height greater than vision height by 1mm.
Screen Cleaner Out Of This error reports that the screen cleaner is out of position.
Position Possible causes are:
Screen Cleaner not at the home position.
Home sensor - enter Diagnostics, Digital Inputs and check
the sensor changes state.
If a screen cleaner is not fitted, check that the home sensor
is not connected.
Screen Couplings Not This error reports that the screen couplings have failed to
Extended extend within the 4 second time-out period.
Screen Fiducial Not Found This error reports that the vision system has been unable to
locate the screen fiducial.
Screen XF Error This error reports that the X forward screen actuator failed
to initialize to its central datum.
Screen XR Error This error reports that the X rear screen actuator failed to
initialize to its central datum.
Screen Y Error This error reports that the Y screen actuator failed to
initialize to its central datum.
Set Pressure %2.21f Actual This error reports if the front/rear squeegee pressure differs
Pressure %2.21f from the pressure set by more than ± 1.00Kg.
(Front/Rear Squeegee)
Stop After Idle Time This error reports if the idle time is exceeded, the options to
Exceeded continue or abort are displayed. Continue resets the idle
timer or abort allows for Manual or Auto unload.
System Power Down This error reports that the 24V motor power has been
switched off either by the Emergency Stop button being
activated (including upline and downline external
machines) or that the removable frame access cover has
been removed
4.6 User Manual Software Version 6
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR MESSAGE LISTING
Error Message Interpretation
System Suspended While This error reports that whilst the machine was switched on,
Covers Open one or more of the cover interlock switches were out of
position.
Table Movement Inhibited, This error reports that the camera is over the table and the
Camera Not Home. mint is sent an instruction to move the rising table.
This Diagnostic Cannot This error reports if proflow is not in the home position
Run Until Proflow Is At (Print Carriage Diagnostics only).
home
This Diagnostic Cannot This error reports if in Print Carriage Diagnostics, Move
Run With Proflow Fitted Print Carriage to Paste Position is selected.
Unable to Find Fiducial This error reports that the vision system is unable to locate
the relevant screen or board fiducial.
Upline Board Transfer This indicates that there is a problem in loading a board
Error from the upline machine.
Upline Machine Not This error reports that the upline machine is unavailable to
Available accept the next board.
Window Error This error reports that the menu structure has failed to open
correctly.
X Actuator Limit Exceeded This error reports that either X actuators are driven past its
limit set during calibration.
Y Actuator Limit Exceeded This error reports that either Y actuators are driven past its
limit set during calibration.
Software Version 6 User Manual 4.7
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR MESSAGE LISTING
4.8 User Manual Software Version 6
CHAPTER 5
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
INTRODUCTION
DIAGNOSTICS
INTRODUCTION The diagnostic function is an aid to the user to allow individual access and
control of motors and modules. It allows the user to control the sequence of the
machine so that a particular module can be exercised.
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
To enter the diagnostic mode press the Maint button and the menu bar changes
displaying the Diagnostic option.
Calibrat Calibrat Calibrat House Set Diagnost Test Exit
Pressure Offset Vision Keeping Prefs cycles
Press the Diagnostic button and the message ‘System Power Down’ is
displayed on the screen, pressing the System button, enters into the main
diagnostic menu. If a password exists a window displays the message
‘Diagnostic Password’. If the password is incorrect control displays the
message ‘Invalid password entered’ and returns to the previous menu. If the
correct password is entered or no password exists a pop up window displays the
following:
Module Diagnostic Page
System
Print Carriage
ProFlow / Squeegee
Camera Axes
Rail System
Paste Dispense System
Screen Alignment
Screen Change
Screen Cleaner
Rising Table
MIU
Autoflex Tooling
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.1
DIAGNOSTICS
INTRODUCTION
The menu bar changes displaying the following:
Select Next Previous Exit
Module
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of diagnostic
modules.
Select Module key opens a new window displaying the diagnostic functions
available for the selected module.
Exit returns operation to the start of initialization.
NOTE
Before any diagnostic function is used in any of the modules they must be homed
first or they are not able to initiate a command.
5.2 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM
SYSTEM Selecting this diagnostic module opens the following window:
System Diagnostics
Display all Digital Inputs
Display all Analogue Inputs
Toggle Red Beacon ON
Toggle Amber Beacon ON
Toggle Green Beacon ON
Toggle Lid Bolt OFF
Data Logging ON
Change Edit Password
Change Diagnostics Password
Change Terminate Password
Change Adjust Password
Change Fiducial Set-Up Password
Change Maintenance Password
Terminate Control Program
The menu bar changes displaying the following:
Run Next Previous Exit
Diagnost
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Run Diagnost activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostic page.
Display All Digital Selecting this diagnostic function opens the following window:
Inputs
Digital Group
NM 1 Group 0
NM 1 Group 1
NM 1 Group 2
NM 1 Group 3
NM 1 Group 4
MMOV 1 Group 0
MMOV 1 Group 1
MMOV 1 Group 2
MMOV 1 Group 3
MMOV 2 Group 0
MMOV 2 Group 1
MMOV 2 Group 2
MMOV 2 Group 3
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.3
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM
The menu bar changes displaying the following:
Select Next Previous Exit
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of diagnostic
modules.
Select key opens a new window displaying the diagnostic functions available for
the selected option.
Exit returns operation to the system diagnostics page.
NM1 is a NextMove I/O card that is housed in the PC. The MMOV1 and
MMOV 2 are MultiMove I/O cards that are housed in the machine controller
enclosure. The NextMove and MultiMove cards monitor and control various
drives and control cards in the machine controller enclosure.
NOTE
The signal listings, shown on the right hand side of the following diagnostic
windows, are not shown on the MMI screen, they are included here as an aid to
show the relationship between the I/O signal and the point description.
NM1 Group 0 NM 1 Group 0
Point Description
--------------------- Bit No ------- Direction
Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
---------
Table HOME 0 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 0
Table LIMIT 1 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 1
Table at Home 2 Negative Input ON DIG IN 2
Rail Lifted Left 3 Negative Input OFF DIG IN 3
Rail Lifted Right 4 Negative Input OFF DIG IN 4
Camera X HOME 5 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 5
Print Carriage HOME 6 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 6
Servo Amp error 7 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 7
NM1 Group 1 NM 1 Group 1
Point Description
--------------------- Bit No ------- Direction
Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
---------
X Rear INDEX 0 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 8
X Rear HOME 1 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 9
X Forward INDEX 2 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 10
X Forward HOME 3 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 11
Y Actuator INDEX 4 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 12
Y Actuator HOME 5 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 13
MUX HOME 6 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 14
Camera Y HOME 7 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 15
5.4 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM
NM1 Group 2 NM 1 Group 2
Point Description
--------------------- Bit No
--------- ------- Direction
Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
Board At Left 0 Negative Input OFF DIG IN 16
Board At Right 1 Negative Input OFF DIG IN 17
Not Used 2 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 18
Not Used 3 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 19
Not Used 4 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 20
Not Used 5 Positive Input OFF DIG IN 21
Board At Stop 6 Negative Input OFF DIG IN 22
Board Stop In 7 Negative Input OFF DIG IN 23
NM1 Group 3 NM 1 Group 3
Point Description
--------------------- Bit No
--------- ------- Direction
Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
Not Used 0 Positive Output OFF DOP 0
Not Used 1 Positive Output OFF DOP 1
MIU Send Upline A 2 Positive Output OFF DOP 2
MIU Send Downline A 3 Positive Output OFF DOP 3
MIU Available Out A 4 Positive Output ON DOP 4
Not Used 5 Positive Output OFF DOP 5
Not Used 6 Positive Output OFF DOP 6
Not Used 7 Positive Output OFF DOP 7
NM1 Group 4 NM 1 Group 4
Point Description
--------------------- Bit No
--------- ------- Direction
Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
MUX control bit 0 0 Positive Output ON DOP 8
MUX control bit 1 1 Positive Output OFF DOP 9
MUX control bit 2 2 Positive Output ON DOP 10
Servo Amp enable 3 Positive Output OFF DOP 11
Not Used 4 Positive Output OFF
Not Used 5 Positive Output OFF
Not Used 6 Positive Output OFF
Not Used 7 Positive Output OFF
MMOV1 Group 0 MMOV 1 Group 0
(X13) Point Description
--------------------- Bit
--------- ------- Direction
No Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
Right Jog Button 0 Positive Input OFF IN 0
Left Jog Button 1 Positive Input OFF IN 1
Not Used 2 Positive Input OFF IN 2
Power On Monitor 3 Positive Input ON IN 3
Not Used 4 Negative Input ON IN 4
Cleaning Unit Home 5 Negative Input ON IN 5
Paper Low 6 Negative Input OFF IN 6
Solvent Low 7 Negative Input OFF IN 7
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.5
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM
MMOV1 Group 1 MMOV 1 Group 1
(X13) Point Description
--------------------- Bit
--------- ------- Direction
No Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
Not Used 0 Positive Input OFF IN 8
Infinity Hardware 1 Positive Input ON IN 9
Not Used 2 Positive Input OFF IN A
Not Used 3 Positive Input OFF IN B
Not Used 4 Positive Input OFF IN C
Machine Available A 5 Positive Input OFF IN D
Downline Ready A 6 Positive Input OFF IN E
Upline Ready A 7 Positive Input OFF IN F
MMOV1 Group 2 MMOV 1 Group 2
(X13) Point Description
--------------------- Bit
--------- ------- Direction
No Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
Not Used 0 Positive Output OFF Totem 0
Green Beacon 1 Positive Output ON Totem 1
Amber Beacon 2 Positive Output OFF Totem 2
Red Beacon 3 Positive Output OFF Totem 3
Not Used 4 Positive Output OFF Totem 4
ProFlow Reg Output 5 Positive Output ON Totem 5
Cleaner Home Clamp 6 Positive Output OFF Totem 6
Chase Clamp 7 Positive Output OFF Totem 7
MMOV1 Group 3 MMOV 1 Group 3
(X13) Point Description
--------------------- Bit
--------- ------- Direction
No Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
Screen Clamp 0 Positive Output OFF Source 0
Cleaner Blade 1 Positive Output OFF Source 1
Not Used 2 Positive Output OFF Source 2
Clamp Board 3 Positive Output OFF Source 3
Board Stop 4 Positive Output OFF Source 4
Not Used 5 Positive Output OFF Source 5
Not Used 6 Positive Output OFF Source 6
Not Used 7 Positive Output OFF Source 7
MMOV2 Group 0 MMOV 2 Group 0
(X12) Point Description
--------------------- Bit
--------- ------- Direction
No Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
Air Pressure 0 Positive Input ON IN 0
Screen Present 1 Positive Input ON IN 1
Lid Bolt Shut 2 Positive Input OFF IN 2
Cartridge Empty 3 Positive Input OFF IN 3
Cartridge Home 4 Negative Input OFF IN 4
Cartridge Away 5 Negative Input OFF IN 5
ProFlow Cassette Low 6 Positive Input OFF IN 6
ProFlow Fitted 7 Positive Input OFF IN 7
5.6 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM
MMOV2 Group 1 MMOV 2 Group 1
(X12) Point Description
--------------------- Bit
--------- ------- Direction
No Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
Not Used 0 Positive Input OFF IN 8
Not Used 1 Positive Input OFF IN 9
ProFlow Reg Fitted 2 Positive Input OFF IN A
Not Used 3 Positive Input OFF IN B
Not Used 4 Positive Input OFF IN C
Not Used 5 Positive Input OFF IN D
Not Used 6 Positive Input OFF IN E
Not Used 7 Positive Input OFF IN F
MMOV2 Group 2 MMOV 2 Group 2
(X12) Point Description
--------------------- Bit
--------- ------- Direction
No Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
Front Belt Forward 0 Positive Output OFF Totem 0
Front Belt Reverse 1 Positive Output OFF Totem 1
Rear Belt Forward 2 Positive Output OFF Totem 2
Rear Belt Reverse 3 Positive Output OFF Totem 3
Tilt Cartridge Away 4 Positive Output OFF Totem 4
Tilt Cartridge Home 5 Positive Output OFF Totem 5
Solvent Pinch Valve 6 Positive Output OFF Totem 6
Cleaner Paper Feed 7 Positive Output OFF Totem 7
MMOV2 Group 3 MMOV 2 Group 3
(X12) Point Description
--------------------- Bit ------- Direction
No Sense ----------- State
------ Signal
---------
Release Table Brake 0 Positive Output ON Source 0
Cleaner Vacuum 1 Positive Output OFF Source 1
Vacuum Valve 2 Positive Output OFF Source 2
ProFlow Reg Control 3 Positive Output OFF Source 3
Tooling Pressure 4 Positive Output OFF Source 4
Lid Bolt 5 Positive Output OFF Source 5
Dispense Paste 6 Positive Output OFF Source 6
Solvent Tank Press 7 Positive Output OFF Source 7
Display All Selecting this diagnostic function opens the following window:
Analogue Inputs
Analogue I/O Values
Description
-------------- Integer Value
---------------- Converted Value
--------------------
Pressure Sensor 2327 8.51 kg
Temperature 3644 24.573
o
C
Relative Humidity 2985 42.386 %
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.7
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM
The menu bar changes to the following:
Exit
Exit returns operation to the system diagnostics page.
Toggle Beacon Selecting any one of the three toggle beacon diagnostic functions, alternately
switches them between on and off.
Toggle Lid Bolt Selecting this function alternately extends and retracts the lid bolt.
Data Logging Selecting this diagnostic function alternately enables and disables data logging
during diagnostic operations.
Change Edit Selection of this option prompts the user to enter a new password.
Password
Change Diagnostic Selecting this diagnostic function either allows a password to be entered or
Password changes an existing password. This password protection inhibits unauthorized
entry into diagnostics.
Change Terminate Selecting this diagnostic function either allows a password to be entered or
Password changes an existing password. This password protection inhibits unauthorized
operation of the terminate control program.
Change Adjust Selecting this diagnostic function allows a password to be entered or changes an
Password existing password. This password protection inhibits unauthorized adjustments.
Change Fiducial Selecting this diagnostic function allows a password to be entered or changes an
Set-Up Password existing password. This password protection inhibits unauthorized entry into the
fiducial setup.
Change Selecting this diagnostic function allows a password to be entered or changes an
Maintenance existing password. This password protection inhibits unauthorized entry into the
Password maintenance functions.
Terminate Control Selecting this diagnostic function terminates the Horizon control program and
Program returns to Windows NT.
5.8 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
PRINT CARRIAGE
PRINT CARRIAGE Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
Print Carriage Diagnostics
Home Print Carriage
Drive Carriage To Front Position
Drive Carriage To Paste Position
Drive Carriage To Rear Position
Drive Carriage Using Jog Buttons
Cycle Print Carriage
Cycle Count Done :- 0, To go :- 50
The menu bar changes to the following:
Run Adjust Next Previous Exit
Diagnost
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Run Diagnost activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
Adjust opens the following window:
Print Carriage Diagnostic Parameters
FRONT PRINT SPEED 25 mm/s
REAR PRINT SPEED 25 mm/s
CYCLE COUNT 50.0 Cycles
The menu bar changes displaying the following:
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of diagnostic
parameters.
Incr. / Decr. keys change the value of the selected diagnostic parameter.
Exit returns operation to the print carriage diagnostics page.
NOTE
These parameters are used in diagnostics only and have no affect on the product
board file.
Home Print Selecting this diagnostic function homes the print carriage, as set by its home
Carriage sensor. ‘Homing Print Carriage’ is displayed in the prompt box. It is always
advisable to home the print carriage before attempting to position it.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.9
DIAGNOSTICS
PRINT CARRIAGE
Drive Carriage to Selecting this diagnostic function moves the print carriage to the front start
Front Position position of the print stroke. ‘Driving Print Carriage to Front Limit’ is
displayed in the prompt box.
Drive Carriage to Selecting this diagnostic function moves the print carriage to a position that
Paste Position clears the paste dispense unit if operated. ‘Driving Print Carriage to Paste
Position’ is displayed in the prompt box.
Drive Carriage to Selecting this diagnostic function moves the print carriage to the end of the print
Rear Position stroke. ‘Driving Print Carriage to Rear Limit’ is displayed in the prompt box.
Drive Carriage Selecting this diagnostic function allows the user to position the print carriage
Using Jog Buttons anywhere between the front and rear position using the two jog buttons. ‘Use
the Left Jog Button to move Print Carriage towards front and the Right Jog
Button to move it towards the rear’ is displayed in the prompt box.
Cycle Print Selecting this diagnostic function starts a continuous cycle of driving the print
Carriage carriage between its front and rear limits, pausing at each end for 2 seconds.
‘Print Carriage Cycling’ is displayed in the prompt box. The cycle is
terminated if the Stop key is used or the set cycle count is reached.
Cycle Count This diagnostic function displays the amount of cycles done and the amount of
cycles to go to complete the cycle count.
5.10 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
PROFLOW
PROFLOW Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
ProFlow Diagnostics
Home ProFlow
Drive System to Contact Height
Drive System to Print Height
Drive System Using Jog Buttons
Toggle Paste Pressure OFF
Pressure Reading 11.42Kg
ProFlow Fitted ON
Paste Cassette Low OFF
ProFlow Pressure Regulator Fitted ON
The menu bar changes to the following:
Run Adjust Next Previous Exit
Diagnost
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Run Diagnost activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
Adjust opens the following window:
ProFlow Adjust Parameters
PFLOW CONTACT POS. 0.0 mm
IDLE PRESSUE 0.2 bar
NOTE
Paste Pressure is only available while a software controlled pressure regulator
is fitted.
The menu bar changes to the following:
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of diagnostic
parameters.
Incr. / Decr. keys change the value of the selected diagnostic parameter.
Exit returns operation to the ProFlow diagnostics page.
Home ProFlow Selecting this diagnostic function drives the ProFlow unit up to the home
position. If the downstop is in the way a warning is displayed.
Drive System to Selecting this diagnostic function drives the ProFlow unit onto the screen, (a
Contact Height slight pressure seal, is made between the ProFlow transfer head and the screen).
There is no pressure applied to the paste cassette.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.11
DIAGNOSTICS
PROFLOW
Drive System to Selecting this diagnostic function drives the ProFlow transfer head down to
Print Height printing pressure (as setup in the Edit Data board file). There is no pressure
applied to the paste cassette at this time.
Drive System Selecting this diagnostic function enables the ProFlow unit to be moved up or
Using Jog Buttons down by means of the jog buttons.
Toggle Paste Selecting this diagnostic function initiates pressure onto the paste cassette.
Pressure Before initiating pressure to the paste cassette, the transfer head must be in
contact with, and have an adequate seal with the screen. A warning is displayed
if toggle paste pressure is selected with the transfer head off the screen.
Pressure Reading This diagnostic function continuously displays the current pressure in kg,
exerted from the squeegee pressure load cell onto the ProFlow unit.
ProFlow Fitted Indication of electrical connection of ProFlow to the machine software.
Paste Cassette Low ProFlow paste low sensor activated (on), indicating paste low or empty or,
deactivated (off).
ProFlow Pressure Switched to OFF indicates that the ProFlow unit is fitted with a mechanical
Regulator Fitted pressure regulator control. Switched to ON indicates that the software
addressable regulator control is activated, (ProFlow unit not fitted with
mechanical pressure regulator).
5.12 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
SQUEEGEE
SQUEEGEE Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
Squeegee Diagnostics
Home Front Squeegee
Home Rear Squeegee
Front Squeegee To Dwell Height
Rear Squeegee To Dwell Height
Rear Squeegee To Flood Height
Drive Front Squeegee Using Jog Buttons
Drive Rear Squeegee Using Jog Buttons
Pressure Reading 22.356 kg
The menu bar changes to the following:
Run Next Previous Exit
Diagnost
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Run Diagnost activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
Home Front Selecting this diagnostic function drives the front squeegee upwards to its home
Squeegee position, as detected by its home sensor.
Home Rear Selecting this diagnostic function drives the rear squeegee upwards to its home
Squeegee position, as detected by its home sensor.
Front Squeegee to Selecting this diagnostic function drives the front squeegee to a position clear of
Dwell Height the top of the screen (default is 24mm).
Rear Squeegee to Selecting this diagnostic function drives the rear squeegee to a position clear of
Dwell Height the top of the screen (default is 24mm).
Rear Squeegee to Selecting this diagnostic function drives the rear squeegee to the height set by the
Flood Height flood reference height parameter.
Drive Front Selecting this diagnostic function enables the front squeegee to driven up and
Squeegee Using down using the jog buttons. The right jog button drives the squeegee down and
Jog Buttons the left jog button drives it up, stopping immediately the button is released. ‘Use
the Left Jog Button to move the Squeegee upwards, and the Right Jog
Button to move it downwards’ is displayed in the message prompt box.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.13
DIAGNOSTICS
SQUEEGEE
Drive Rear Selecting this diagnostic function enables the rear squeegee to be driven up and
Squeegee Using down using the jog buttons. The right jog button drives the squeegee down and
Jog Buttons the left jog button drives it up, stopping immediately the button is released. ‘Use
the Left Jog Button to move the Squeegee upwards, and the Right Jog
Button to move it downwards’ is displayed in the prompt box.
Pressure Reading If the pressure feedback option is fitted, this diagnostic function is a live display
showing the actual pressure being applied to the squeegee. With no squeegees
fitted the figure displayed varies from machine to machine. If the pressure
feedback option is not fitted, the pressure reading is ‘NOT FITTED’.
5.14 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
CAMERA AXES
CAMERA AXES Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
Camera Diagnostics
Home Camera X Axis
Home Camera Y Axis
Camera Axis To Fiducial 1 Position
Camera Axis To Fiducial 2 Position
Camera Axis To Fiducial 3 Position
Drive to Board Stop Position
Restore Default Reference Position
Drive to Reference Position
Set Reference Position
Move Camera X Axis Using Jog Buttons
Move Camera Y Axis Using Jog Buttons
Initialise Vision System
Fiducial Lighting ON
Inspection Lighting ON
.. more
The menu bar changes to the following:
Run Adjust Fiducial Next Previous Exit
Diagnost Setup
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Run Diagnost activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
Fiducial Setup enables screen fiducials to be located.
Adjust opens the following window:
Camera Cycle Test Parameters
FIDUCIAL 1 X 243.0 mm
FIDUCIAL 1 Y 241.1 mm
FIDUCIAL 2 X 7.3 mm
FIDUCIAL 2 Y 8.8 mm
FIDUCIAL 3 X 0.0 mm
FIDUCIAL 3 Y 0.0 mm
BOARD STOP X 125.0 mm
BOARD STOP Y 165.0 mm
CYCLE COUNT 50.0 Cycles
The menu bar changes to the following:
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of diagnostic
parameters.
Incr. / Decr. keys change the value of the selected diagnostic parameter.
Exit returns operation to the camera diagnostics page.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.15
DIAGNOSTICS
CAMERA AXES
NOTE
These parameters are used in diagnostics only and have no affect on the product
board file.
Home Camera Selecting this diagnostic function drives the camera X carriage to its home
X Axis position, as determined by its home sensor.
Home Camera Selecting this diagnostic function drives the camera Y carriage to its home
Y Axis position, as determined by its home sensor.
Camera Axis to Selecting this diagnostic function drives both X and Y carriages to the position
Fiducial 1 Position set by the fiducial 1 X and Y coord parameters.
Camera Axis to Selecting this diagnostic function drives both X and Y carriages to the position
Fiducial 2 Position set by the fiducial 2 X and Y coord parameters.
Camera Axis to Selecting this diagnostic function drives both X and Y carriages to the position
Fiducial 3 Position set by the fiducial 3 X and Y coord parameters.
Drive to Board Stop Selecting this diagnostic function drives both X and Y carriages to the position
Position of the board stop for the current product.
Restore Default Selecting this diagnostic function restores the reference position stored as a
Reference Position default in software.
Drive to Reference Selecting this diagnostic function drives both X and Y carriages to the position
Position set by the camera X and Y reference parameters.
Set Reference Selecting this diagnostic function alters the printer configuration file after the
Position camera has been positioned, so that it is viewing the reference mark on the front
rail. On selection the menu bar displays Confirm, pressing this key alters the
printer configuration file. This is used in conjunction with move camera X and
Y axes. Refer to the Technical Reference Manual, Camera and Vision System
Chapter for the camera reference position procedure.
Move Camera X Selecting this diagnostic function moves the camera X axis using the jog
Axis Using Jog buttons. The right jog button drives the camera to the left at slow speed and the
Buttons left jog button drives the camera to the right, stopping immediately the button is
released. This is a physical movement of the camera, not as displayed on the
monitor.
5.16 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
CAMERA AXES
Move Camera Y Selecting this diagnostic function moves the camera Y axis using the jog
Axis Using Jog buttons. The right jog button drives the camera to the rear at slow speed and the
Buttons left jog button drives the camera forward, stopping immediately the button is
released. This is a physical movement of the camera, not as displayed on the
monitor.
Initialize Vision Selecting this diagnostic function initializes the frame grabber board and it
System displays a live image on the vision monitor and a superimposed box graphic.
Fiducial Lighting Selecting this diagnostic function alternately switches the fiducial lighting on
and off, continuously displaying the current status.
Inspection Lighting Selecting this diagnostic function alternately switches the inspection lighting on
and off, continuously displaying the current status.
Cycle Camera Selecting this diagnostic function starts a continuous cycle of driving the camera
System X and Y carriages to each of the following positions in sequence, dwelling for 2
seconds at each point, locating the fiducial at each fiducial position, displaying
the returned location and repeating the cycle. The cycle is as follows:
1. Home
2. Fiducial 1
3. Fiducial 2
If the data logging is enabled the fiducial coordinates are appended to
D:\Program Files\DEK\Machinecontrol\Printer\[Link] file. This
continuous cycle is terminated by selecting the stop key or when the set cycle
count has been reached.
Cycle Count This diagnostic function displays the amount of cycles done and the amount of
cycles to go to complete the cycle count.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.17
DIAGNOSTICS
RAIL SYSTEM
RAIL SYSTEM Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
Rail System Diagnostics
Home Rail Width
Drive Rail To Board Width
Drive Rail Width Using Two Button Control
Drive Belts Using Two Button Control
Belt Speed Calibration
Toggle Board Clamp OFF
Toggle Board Stop OFF
Cycle Board On Belts
Cycle Board Clamp
Cycle Rails
Board Stop In Position OFF
Board at Stop OFF
Board at Left OFF
.. more
The menu bar changes to the following:
Run Adjust Next Previous Exit
Diagnost
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Run Diagnost activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
Adjust opens the following window:
Rail System Test Parameters
BOARD WIDTH 250.0 mm
CYCLE COUNT 50 Cycles
The menu bar changes to the following:
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of diagnostic
parameters.
Incr. / Decr. keys change the value of the selected diagnostic parameter.
Exit returns operation to the rail system diagnostics page.
NOTE
These parameters are used in diagnostics only and have no affect on the product
board file.
5.18 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
RAIL SYSTEM
Home Rail Width Selecting this diagnostic function drives the rail width motor to its home position
as determined by its home sensor.
Drive Rail to Board Selecting this diagnostic function drives the rail width motor to the width set by
Width the board width parameter.
Drive Rail Width Selecting this diagnostic function drives the rail width motor using the jog
Using Two Button buttons. The right jog button drives the rail width motor forward at slow speed
Control and the left jog button drives it to the rear, stopping immediately the button is
released.
Drive Belts Using Selecting this diagnostic function drives the belt motors using the jog buttons.
Two Button Control The right Jog button drives the belt motors to the right and the left Jog button
drives the belt motors to the left, stopping immediately the button is released.
Belt Speed Selecting this diagnostic function enables the belt speed calibration to be carried
Calibration out. For information on the belt speed calibration procedure see the Technical
Reference Manual, Rail System Chapter.
Toggle Board Selecting this diagnostic function alternately energizes and de-energizes the
Clamp board clamp, displaying On when energized and Off when de-energized.
Toggle Board Stop Selecting this diagnostic function alternately lowers and raises the board stop
housed in the camera assembly, displaying On when lowered and Off when
raised.
Cycle Board on Selecting this diagnostic function starts a continuous cycle of driving the belts to
Belts the right, until a board reaches the right board sensor, dwelling for 2 seconds and
driving the belts to the left, until a board reaches the left board sensor, dwelling
for 2 seconds and repeating the cycle, until stop is pressed or the set cycle count
is reached.
Cycle Board Clamp Selecting this diagnostic function starts a continuous cycle of clamping and
unclamping the board clamps. ‘Cycling Clamps....’ is displayed in the message
prompt box.
Cycle Rails Selecting this diagnostic function drives the moveable rail from the home
position to the minimum board width and back to the home position. ‘Cycling
Rails....’ is displayed in the message prompt box.
Board Stop in This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the board stop
Position lowered sensor.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.19
DIAGNOSTICS
RAIL SYSTEM
Board at Stop This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the board at stop
sensor.
Board at Left This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the left board sensor.
On is displayed if a board is detected on the rails at the left of the machine.
Board at Right This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the right board
sensor. On is displayed if a board is detected on the rails at the right of the
machine.
Cycle Count This diagnostic function displays the amount of cycles done and the amount of
cycles to go to complete the cycle count.
5.20 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
PASTE DISPENSE SYSTEM
PASTE DISPENSE SYSTEM
Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
Paste Dispense System Diagnostics
Carriage Home
Drive Carriage To Start Position
Drive Carriage To End Position
Drive Cartridge Down
Drive Cartridge Up
Toggle Paste Dispense OFF
Paste Cartridge Empty ON
Cartridge in Down Position OFF
Cartridge in Up Position ON
The menu bar changes to the following:
Run Next Previous Exit
Diagnost
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Run Diagnost activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
Carriage Home Selecting this diagnostic function drives the paste dispense carriage left to its
home position, as determined by its home sensor.
Drive Carriage to Selecting this diagnostic function drives the paste dispense carriage to the
Start Position position set by the paste start parameter.
Drive Carriage to Selecting this diagnostic function drives the paste dispense carriage to the
End Position position set by the paste stop parameter.
Drive Cartridge Selecting this diagnostic function drives the cartridge tilt motor down until the
Down cartridge away (down) sensor is detected.
Drive Cartridge Up Selecting this diagnostic function drives the cartridge tilt motor up until the
cartridge home (up) sensor is detected.
Toggle Paste Selecting this diagnostic function alternately applies and removes the air
Dispense pressure to the paste dispense cartridge, displaying On when air pressure is
applied and Off when air pressure is removed.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.21
DIAGNOSTICS
PASTE DISPENSE SYSTEM
Paste Cartridge This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the cartridge empty
Empty sensor.
Cartridge in Down This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the cartridge away
Position (down) sensor.
Cartridge in Up This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the cartridge home
Position (up) sensor.
5.22 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
SCREEN ALIGNMENT
SCREEN ALIGNMENT
Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
Screen Alignment Diagnostics
Home Actuators
Drive X Forward Motor Using Jog Buttons
Drive X Rear Motor Using Jog Buttons
Drive Y Motor Using Jog Buttons
Toggle Chase Clamp ON
Cycle Alignment System
Cycle Count Done :- 0, To go :- 50
The menu bar changes to the following:
Run Adjust Next Previous Exit
Diagnost
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Run Diagnost activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
Adjust opens the following window:
Actuator Cycle Test Parameters
CYCLE COUNT 50.0 Cycles
The menu bar changes to the following:
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Next / Previous keys have no function in this application.
Incr. / Decr. keys change the value of the cycle count.
Exit returns operation to the screen alignment diagnostics page.
Home Actuators Selecting this diagnostic function drives the X forward, X Rear and Y Axis
actuators simultaneously to their home positions, as determined by their home
sensors.
Drive X Forward Selecting this diagnostic function drives the X forward actuator using the jog
Motor Using buttons. The right Jog button to drive the X forward actuator right at slow speed
Jog Buttons and the left Jog button drives it left, stopping immediately the button is released.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.23
DIAGNOSTICS
SCREEN ALIGNMENT
Drive X Rear Motor Selecting this diagnostic function drives the X rear actuator using the jog
Using Jog Buttons buttons. The right jog button drives the X rear actuator right at slow speed and
the left jog button drives it left, stopping immediately the button is released.
Drive Y Motor Selecting this diagnostic function drives the Y actuator using the jog buttons.
Using Jog Buttons The right jog button drives the Y actuator forward at slow speed and the left jog
button drives it to the rear, stopping immediately the button is released.
Toggle Chase Selecting this diagnostic function alternately energizes and de-energizes the
Clamp chase clamp solenoid, displaying On when the clamps are energized and Off
when the clamps are de-energized.
Cycle Alignment Selecting this diagnostic function starts a continuous cycle of driving the screen
System actuators to each of the positions in the table below in sequence, dwelling for 2
seconds at each point and continuing the cycle.
The positions are given as XF, XR and Y in mm from the home position and are
as follows:
1 0, 0, 0.
2 +20, +10, +10.
3 0, 0, 0.
4 -20, -10, -10.
5 0, 0, 0.
6 +10, +20, -10.
7 0, 0, 0.
8 -10, -20, +10.
If data logging is enabled, every time the screen returns to 0,0,0, locate a screen
f i duci al and i t s c o o r d i n a t e s a r e a p p e n d e d t o D : \ P ro g ra m
Files\DEK\Machinecontrol\Printer\[Link] file. This continuous cycling is
terminated by selecting the stop key or when the set cycle count has been
reached.
Cycle Count This diagnostic function displays the amount of cycles done and the amount of
cycles to go to complete the cycle count.
5.24 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
SCREEN CHANGE
SCREEN CHANGE Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
Screen Change Diagnostics
Toggle Screen Clamps OFF
Screen Sensor ON
The menu bar changes to the following:
Run Next Previous Exit
Diagnost
Next / Previous keys have no function in this application.
Run Diagnost activates the toggle screen clamps diagnostic function.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
Toggle Screen Selecting this diagnostic function alternately energizes and de-energizes the
Clamps screen clamps, displaying On when energized and Off when de-energized.
Screen Sensor This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the screen sensor.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.25
DIAGNOSTICS
SCREEN CLEANER
SCREEN CLEANER
Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
Screen Cleaner Diagnostics
Toggle Dry Wipe Blade ON
Toggle Pinch Valve (if fitted) ON
Toggle Paper Feed ON
Toggle Vacuum ON
Toggle Solvent Feed/Tank Press ON
Toggle Screen Cleaner Home Clamp ON
Cycle Pinch Valve
Cycle Clean Blade
Cleaner Paper Low/Advance ON
Cleaner Solvent Low ON
Pinch Valve Fitted ON
Cycle Count Done :- 0, To go :- 50
..more
NOTE
Toggle Paper Feed and Cleaner Paper Low/Advance are not present when the
Vortex under screen cleaner is fitted.
The menu bar changes to the following:
Run Adjust Next Previous Exit
Diagnost
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Run Diagnost activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
Adjust opens the following window:
Cleaner Cycle Parameters
CYCLE COUNT 50.0 Cycles
The menu bar changes to the following:
Incr. Decr. Exit
Incr. / Decr. keys change the value of the cycle count.
Exit returns operation to the screen cleaner diagnostics page.
Toggle Dry Wipe Selecting this diagnostic function raises and lowers the cleaner body assembly,
Blade displaying On when the cleaner body assembly is raised and Off when the
cleaner body assembly is lowered.
5.26 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
SCREEN CLEANER
Toggle Pinch Valve Selecting this diagnostic function alternately energizes and de-energizes the
solvent valve, displaying On when the solvent valve is energized and Off when
the solvent valve is de-energized.
Toggle Paper Feed Selecting this diagnostic function alternately switches the paper feed motor on
and off, displaying its current status. This function is not displayed if the Vortex
under screen cleaner is fitted.
Toggle Vacuum Selecting this diagnostic function alternately switches the vacuum pump on and
off, displaying its current status.
Toggle Solvent Selecting this diagnostic function alternately energizes and de-energizes the
Feed/Tank Pressure solvent tank pressure solenoid, displaying On when air pressure is switched to
the tank and Off when air pressure is removed.
Toggle Screen Selecting this diagnostic function alternately energizes and de-energizes the
Cleaner Home screen cleaner home clamp electromagnet, displaying its status.
Clamp
Cycle Pinch Valve Selecting this diagnostic function continuously opens and closes the solvent
valve for the number of cycles specified in the cycle count.
Cycle Clean Blade Selecting this diagnostic function continuously raises and lowers the cleaner
body assembly for the number of cycles specified in the cycle count.
Cleaner Paper Low This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the cleaner paper
/Advance low/advance sensor. This function is not displayed if the Vortex under screen
cleaner is fitted.
Cleaner Solvent This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the cleaner solvent
Low low sensor.
Pinch Valve Fitted This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the solvent valve.
Cycle Count This diagnostic function displays the amount of cycles done and the amount of
cycles to go to complete the cycle count.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.27
DIAGNOSTICS
RISING TABLE
RISING TABLE Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
Rising Table Diagnostics
Home Rising Table
Raise Table to Vision Height
Raise Table to Print Height
Restore Default Heights
Set Reference Vision Height
Set Reference Print Height
Drive Table using Jog Buttons
Toggle Table Brake OFF
Toggle Vacuum Tooling Valve OFF
Cycle Rising Table
Rail Lifted Left OFF
Rail Lifted Right OFF
Table at Home ON
Cycle Count Done :- 0, To go :- 50
The menu bar changes to the following:
Run Adjust Next Previous Exit
Diagnost
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Run Diagnost activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
Adjust opens the following window:
Table Cycle Test Parameters
CYCLE COUNT 50.0 Cycles
The menu bar changes to the following:
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Next / Previous keys have no function in this application.
Incr. / Decr. keys change the value of the cycle count.
Exit returns operation to the rising table diagnostics page.
Home Rising Table Selecting this diagnostic function drives the rising table down to the home
position, as indicated by its home sensor.
Raise Table to Selecting this diagnostic function drives the rising table to the height set by the
Vision Height vision height parameter.
5.28 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
RISING TABLE
Raise Table to Print Selecting this diagnostic function first checks that the camera carriage is at
Height home, if not at home the message ‘Table Movement Inhibited, Camera Not
Home’ is displayed. If the camera is at home, the rising table drives up to the
height set by the print height parameter.
Restore Default Selecting this diagnostic function restores the vision height to the default of 50
Heights mm and the print height to the default of 127 mm.
Set Reference Selecting this diagnostic function enables the rising table vision height to be set
Vision Height so that the camera views the board fiducials in focus. This is achieved by driving
the table up or down while viewing the vision monitor until the fiducial is in
focus. Pressing Calibrate Vision Height changes the menu Bar showing the
option Confirm. Pressing Confirm sets the current height of the rising table,
updating the printer configuration file. Refer to the Technical Reference
Manual, Camera and Vision System Chapter for the camera reference position
procedure.
Set Reference Print Selecting this diagnostic function enables the print height to be set so that no gap
Height exists between the screen and board. Refer to the Technical Reference Manual,
Rising Table Chapter for the print height calibration procedure.
Drive Table Using Selecting this diagnostic function enables the right jog button to drive the rising
Jog Buttons table up at slow speed and the left jog button to drive the table down, stopping
immediately the button is released.
Toggle Table Brake Selecting this diagnostic function alternately switches the table brake on and off,
while continuously displaying the current status.
Toggle Vacuum Selecting this diagnostic function alternately switches the vacuum tooling
Tooling Valve solenoid on and off, to supply and remove pneumatic pressure to the venturi
vacuum pump, continuously displaying the current status.
Cycle Rising Table Selecting this diagnostic function first checks that the camera carriage is at
home, if not the message ‘Table Movement Inhibited, Camera Not Home’ is
displayed. If the camera is at home, a continuous cycle starts driving the rising
table to print height, dwelling for 2 seconds, driving the table down to its datum
height, dwelling for 2 seconds and repeating the cycle until stop is pressed or the
set cycle count has been reached.
Rail Lifted Left This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the rail lifted left
sensor. Off is displayed when the rail has been lifted.
Rail Lifted Right This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the rail lifted right
sensor. Off is displayed when the rail has been lifted.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.29
DIAGNOSTICS
RISING TABLE
Table at Home This diagnostic function continuously displays the status of the home interlock
sensor. On is displayed when the rising table is in the home position.
Cycle Count This diagnostic function displays the amount of cycles done and the amount of
cycles to go to complete the cycle count.
5.30 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
MULTI INTERFACE UNIT
MULTI INTERFACE UNIT
Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
MIU Diagnostics
Toggle Available A SET Machine Available A ON
Upline A CLEAR Downline Ready A OFF
Downline A CLEAR Upline Ready A OFF
The menu bar changes to the following:
Toggle Next Previous Exit
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Toggle activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
NOTE
This diagnostic can only be run when the machine is connected to an upline and
downline machine.
Toggle Available A This diagnostic function is currently not used.
Toggle Upline A Selecting this diagnostic function sends a request to the upline machine to send a
board.
Toggle Downline A Selecting this diagnostic function sends a request to the downline machine to
receive a board.
Machine Available AThis diagnostic function is currently not used.
Downline Ready A This diagnostic function continuously displays whether the downline machine is
ready to receive a board.
Upline Ready A This diagnostic function continuously displays whether the upline machine is
ready to send a board.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.31
DIAGNOSTICS
AUTOFLEX TOOLING
AUTOFLEX TOOLING
Selecting this diagnostics module opens the following window:
Autoflex Diagnostics
Tooling Pins Down
Clamp Enable ON
Clamp Power LO
Change Pin Status
Cycle Autoflex Tooling
The menu bar changes displaying the following:
Run Next Previous Exit
Diagnost
Next / Previous keys move the highlight bar up and down the list of selectable
diagnostic functions.
Run Diagnost activates the diagnostic function, as selected by the highlight bar.
Exit returns operation to the module diagnostics page.
Tooling Pins Selecting this diagnostic function alternately lifts and lowers all the pins,
continuously displaying the current status.
Clamp Enable Selecting this diagnostic function alternately switches the electromagnet clamps
on or off, continuously displaying the current status. Any pins that are up when
the clamp is switched off automatically lower.
Clamp Power Selecting this diagnostic function alternately switches the power through the
electromagnetic coils between high and low, continuously displaying the current
status.
5.32 User Manual Software Version 6
DIAGNOSTICS
AUTOFLEX TOOLING
Change Pin Status Selecting this diagnostic function enables different pin patterns to be exercised.
On selection the following window opens:
Autoflex Matrix
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 14
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
M
- - 1
A B C D E F G H I J K L N O
The menu bar changes to the following:
Lower Raise Set Left Right Up Down Exit
Status
Left, Right, Up and Down keys move the cursor to enable individual pins to be
selected.
Lower or Raise keys enable the selected pin to be raised or lowered.
Set Status key enables the AutoFlex to set the selected pin pattern. The message
Setting Up AutoFlex Tooling is displayed in the message window.
Exit returns operation to the AutoFlex diagnostics page.
Cycle AutoFlex Selecting this diagnostic function cycles the AutoFlex pins in a set pattern. The
Tooling pattern is as follows:
1. All the pins are raised.
2. The pins are lowered leaving a third raised, every third pin.
3. All the pins are raised.
4. The pins are lowered leaving a second third raised.
5. All the pins are raised.
6. The pins are lowered leaving the last third raised.
7. The process repeats until the Stop key is pressed.
Software Version 6 User Manual 5.33
DIAGNOSTICS
AUTOFLEX TOOLING
5.34 User Manual Software Version 6
CHAPTER 6
MONITOR
MONITOR
INTRODUCTION
MONITOR
INTRODUCTION The Monitor function allows for the setting of the following functions:
• Log On
• Host Comms
• Clear Batch
• Batch Limit
• Perform Display
• Event Display
• System Disable
To access the monitor functions proceed as follows:
Select the Monitor button from the run menu.
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
The menu bar displays the following options:
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
Software Version 6 User Manual 6.1
MONITOR
LOG ON/OFF
LOG ON/OFF
Log On This function identifies the user of the machine. To log on to the machine
proceed as follows:
1. Select Log On.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
The Operator Log On window is displayed as follows:
Operator Log On
Enter Operator ID:
2. Using the keyboard enter the operator’s name/ID and press Enter, the
operator’s name/ID appears on the status page.
3. Select Exit.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
Off Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
Log Off To log off from the machine proceed as follows:
1. Select Log Off.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
Off Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
2. The operator’s name/ID is removed from the status page and the menu bar
changes to the following:
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
6.2 User Manual Software Version 6
MONITOR
HOST COMMS
HOST COMMS For information on the Host Comms function see the Host Communications
Chapter.
Software Version 6 User Manual 6.3
MONITOR
CLEAR BATCH
CLEAR BATCH Allows the user to reset cycle time, batch count, board count and throughput
information on the status page. To reset the batch proceed as follows:
1. Press Monitor.
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Press Clear Batch.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
3. Press Exit.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
6.4 User Manual Software Version 6
MONITOR
BATCH LIMIT
BATCH LIMIT To set the batch limit proceed as follows:
1. Select Batch Limit.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
The Batch Count Limit window is displayed as follows:
Batch Count Limit
Batch Limit 0
2. Using the Incr. and Decr. keys as required set the batch limit.
Incr. Decr. Exit
3. Select Exit.
Incr. Decr. Exit
Software Version 6 User Manual 6.5
MONITOR
PERFORM DISPLAY
PERFORM DISPLAY
Displays machine performance information in a tabular format. To view the
performance information proceed as follows:
1. Select Perform Display.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
The Performance Information window is displayed as follows:
Performance Information
Current Status : Wait
Batch Session Total
Board Count 0 0 1786
Start Time [Link] [Link]
Wait Time [Link] [Link] [Link]
Run Time [Link] [Link] [Link]
Setup Time [Link] [Link] [Link]
Down Time [Link] [Link] [Link]
Recovery Time [Link] [Link] [Link]
Maintenance Time [Link] [Link] [Link]
2. Select Exit.
Exit
6.6 User Manual Software Version 6
MONITOR
EVENT DISPLAY
EVENT DISPLAY Displays the machine event record in a tabular format. To view the event record
proceed as follows:
1. Select Event Display.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
The Event Record window is displayed as follows:
Event Record
Date Time Event
05/09/97 [Link] 31252 Line Power Off
05/09/97 [Link] 31251 Line Power On
05/09/97 [Link] 31259 Paste Cartridge empty
05/09/97 [Link] 31269 Screen Loaded
05/09/97 [Link] 31255 Printer Ready
05/09/97 [Link] 31273 Clear Batch Count
05/09/97 [Link] 31275 Cover Closed
05/09/97 [Link] 31279 Setup Ended
05/09/97 [Link] 31281 System Power On
05/09/97 [Link] 31289 Clear Batch Count
2. Select Latest to access latest machine events.
Select Next to access later machine events.
Select Previous to access earlier machine events.
Latest Next Previous Exit
3. Select Exit.
Latest Next Previous Exit
Software Version 6 User Manual 6.7
MONITOR
SYSTEM DISABLE
SYSTEM DISABLE
To disable the system software proceed as follows:
1. Select System Disable.
Log Host Clear Batch Perform Event System Exit
On Comms Batch Limit Display Display Disable
The System Error window is displayed as follows:
System Error
System Power Down
2. Press the System button to re-initiate the system.
6.8 User Manual Software Version 6
CHAPTER 7
HOUSE KEEPING
HOUSE KEEPING
INTRODUCTION
HOUSE KEEPING
INTRODUCTION The Housekeeping system enables the user to manipulate data from the local
drive, floppy drive and network drives whilst remaining within the software
environment, thus alleviating the requirement to use DOS.
Housekeeping allows the user to copy, print and delete files, and also to set the
time and date on the machine.
To access the housekeeping options select the Maint. Button.
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
Select the House Keeping button.
Calibrat Calibrat Calibrat House Set Diagnost Test Exit
Pressure Offset Vision Keeping Prefs Cycles
The menu bar displays the following options:
Set Set Print Copy Delete Exit
Date Time Data Data Data
Software Version 6 User Manual 7.1
HOUSE KEEPING
SET DATE
SET DATE The Set Date option allows the user to set the current date on the machine.
On selecting Set Date the following window is displayed:
Change date page
Year : 1997
Month : 11
Day : 10
The menu bar changes to the following:
Set Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
The Next and Previous keys move the cursor between the three parameters.
The Incr. and Decr. keys change the value of the highlighted parameter.
The Set key sets the newly entered figure, as shown in the title window on the
status page.
The Exit key returns to the previous menu. Pressing Exit without pressing Set
returns the machine to the previous date.
7.2 User Manual Software Version 6
HOUSE KEEPING
SET TIME
SET TIME The Set Time option allows the user to set the current time on the machine.
On selecting Set Time the following window is displayed:
Change time page
Hour : 15
Minute : 25
Second : 45
The menu bar changes to the following:
Set Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
The Next and Previous keys move the cursor between the three parameters.
The Incr. and Decr. keys change the value of the highlighted parameter.
The Set key sets the newly entered figure, as shown in the title window on the
status page.
The Exit key returns to the previous menu. Pressing Exit without pressing Set
returns the machine to the previous time.
Software Version 6 User Manual 7.3
HOUSE KEEPING
PRINT DATA
PRINT DATA The Print Data option allows the user to output the following data to the local
printer or to a disk in the machines floppy drive:
Data Option File Output ([Link] files)
Product Data Chosen Product Data File
Event Log [Link]
Config Data [Link]
Manage Data [Link]
SPC Data [Link]
On selecting Print Data the following window is displayed:
Drive
Print From: Local Drive
Print Data
Product Data
Event Log
Config File
Management
SPC Data
The menu bar changes to the following:
Print Print Up Down Exit
Printer File
The Print Printer key prints the chosen file to the local printer, if Product Data
is highlighted a further window and menu bar open to allow the user to select the
required product data file (see next page).
The Print File key outputs the print file to the machines floppy drive, the file has
a .PRN extension. If Product Data is highlighted a further window and menu bar
open to allow the user to select the required product data file (see next page).
The Up and Down keys move the cursor between the data file types.
The Exit key returns to the previous menu bar.
7.4 User Manual Software Version 6
HOUSE KEEPING
PRINT DATA
If the Print Printer or Print File keys are pressed when Product Data is
highlighted the following window is displayed:
Print Data File
265TEST1
CALIBRA
DEFAULT
Search Product ID
265TEST1 265TEST1-
The menu bar changes to the following:
Print Print Left Right Up Down Exit
Printer Data
The Left and Right keys move between columns (if displayed).
The Up and Down keys move vertically through the files.
Exit returns to the housekeeping display without any other action.
Print Printer outputs the Product File to the local printer.
Print File outputs the Product File to the machines floppy drive, the file has a
.PRN extension.
Software Version 6 User Manual 7.5
HOUSE KEEPING
COPY DATA
COPY DATA The Copy Data function allows the operator to copy data between the local hard
drive, local drive and network drives.
On selecting Copy Data the following window is displayed:
Drive
Copy From: Floppy Drive
Copy To: Local Drive
Copy Data
Product Data
Event Log
Test Data
SPC Data
Config Data
Service Data
Deviation Data
Image Data
NOTE
Image Data is only available on machines with 2D Inspection. Deviation Data
is only available on machines with Tooling Monitoring authorized.
The menu bar changes to the following:
Copy Copy Up Down From To Exit
Data All Disk Disk
NOTE
Copy All is only available when Product Data is highlighted.
The Up and Down keys move the cursor between the various data types.
The From Disk key allows selection of the disk to copy from, options are:
Local Drive; Floppy Drive; Network Drive.
The To Disk key allows selection of the disk to be copied to, options are:
Local Drive; Floppy Drive; Network Drive.
The Exit key returns to the previous menu.
The function of the Copy Data key depends upon the data type selected. If
Event Log, Test Data, Config Data, Service Data, Deviation Data or SPC Data
are selected the files are transferred directly from the source to the destination
and no further options are given.
NOTE
Copying Config Data copies the following files:
• [Link]
• [Link]
These files are required if a Windows NT recovery procedure is required on the
machine.
7.6 User Manual Software Version 6
HOUSE KEEPING
COPY DATA
The file names under each item are as follows:
Event Log Test Data SPC Data Config Data Service Data Deviation Data
[Link] [Link] [Link] [Link] [Link] [Link]
[Link] [Link] [Link]
[Link] [Link]
[Link] [Link]
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]
If the Copy Data key is pressed when Product Data is highlighted, the message
‘Do you also want to create a copy of the inspection data?’ is displayed. The
following window is displayed:
Copy Data File
265TEST1
CALIBRA
DEFAULT
Search Product ID
265TEST1 265TEST1-
The menu bar changes to the following:
Yes No
The Yes key copies the highlighted product data file between the drives as
indicated, with all the inspection data that is associated with it. The message
‘Copying All Files Please Wait’ is displayed.
The No key copies the highlighted product data file between the drives as
indicated, without the inspection data that is associated with it. The message
‘Copying All Files Please Wait’ is displayed.
Software Version 6 User Manual 7.7
HOUSE KEEPING
COPY DATA
If the Copy Data key is pressed when Image Data is highlighted, the following
window is displayed:
Copy Data File
Insp0000
Insp0001
Insp0002
Insp0003
Insp0004
Insp0005
The menu bar changes to the following:
Copy Left Right Up Down Exit
File
The Copy File key copies the selected product data file from the source to the
destination.
The Left and Right keys move the cursor between product file columns (if
displayed).
The Up and Down keys move the cursor between the various product data files.
The Exit key returns to the previous menu.
If the Copy All key is pressed when Product Data is highlighted, the message
‘Do you also want to create a copy of the inspection data associated with
each process program that is to be copied?’ is displayed. The menu bar
changes to the following:
Yes No
The Yes key copies all the product data files between the drives as indicated,
with all the inspection data that is associated with them. The message ‘Copying
All Files Please Wait’ is displayed.
The No key copies all the product data files between the drives as indicated,
without the inspection data that is associated with them. The message ‘Copying
All Files Please Wait’ is displayed.
7.8 User Manual Software Version 6
HOUSE KEEPING
DELETE DATA
DELETE DATA The Delete Data function allows the operator to delete various data types.
On selecting the Delete Data key the following window is displayed:
Drive
Delete From: Local Drive
Delete Data
Product Data
Event Log
Test Data
SPC Data
Config Data
Service Data
Deviation Data
Image Data
NOTE
Image Data is available with 2D Inspection only. Deviation Data is only
available on machines with Tooling Monitoring authorized.
The menu bar changes to the following:
Delete Up Down Exit
Data
The Up and Down keys move the cursor through the data types.
The function of the Delete Data option depends on the type of data selected, the
options are:
Product Data; Event Log; Test Data; SPC Data; Config Data; Service Data;
Deviation Data; Image Data
Product Data If the Delete Data key is pressed when Product Data is highlighted the following
window is displayed:
Delete Data File
265TEST1
CALIBRA
DEFAULT
Search Product ID
265TEST1 265TEST1-
Software Version 6 User Manual 7.9
HOUSE KEEPING
DELETE DATA
The menu bar changes to the following:
Delete Left Right Up Down Exit
The Left and Right keys move the cursor between columns of Product Data
Files.
The Up and Down keys move the cursor between the Product Data Files.
The Exit key returns to the previous menu.
On pressing the Delete key, the message ‘Confirm deletion of selected product
data’ is displayed in the message prompt box, asking the user to confirm the
deletion request, the menu bar changes displaying the Yes and No options:
Yes No
Event Log When the Event Log is highlighted, the menu bar changes to the following:
Delete Delete Delete Up Down Exit
All Date Number
On pressing the Delete All key, the message ‘Confirm deletion of All Event
Data’ is displayed in the message prompt box, asking the user to confirm the
deletion request, the menu bar changes displaying the Yes and No options.
Yes No
On pressing the Delete Date key the following window is displayed:
Delete event to date
Delete all event records
prior to : Fri Dec 18 1998
The menu bar changes to the following:
Delete Incr. Decr. Exit
The Incr. and Decr. keys change the highlighted date.
The Delete key deletes all event files prior to the indicated date, the message
‘Deleting Events...’ is displayed in the message prompt box.
The Exit key returns to the previous menu.
7.10 User Manual Software Version 6
HOUSE KEEPING
DELETE DATA
On pressing the Delete Number key the following window is displayed:
Delete event by number
Delete all event records
except the most recent :
1
The menu bar changes to the following:
Delete Incr. Decr. Exit
The Incr. and Decr. keys change the highlighted number.
The Delete key deletes all event files prior to the indicated number, the message
‘Deleting Events...’ is displayed in the message prompt box.
The Exit key returns to the previous menu.
Test Data If the Delete Data key is pressed when Test Data is highlighted, the message
‘Confirm deletion of Test Data’ is displayed in the message prompt box,
asking the user to confirm the deletion request, the menu bar changes displaying
the Yes and No options.
Yes No
SPC Data If the Delete Data key is pressed when SPC Data is highlighted, the message
‘Confirm deletion of SPC Data’ is displayed in the message prompt box,
asking the user to confirm the deletion request, the menu bar changes displaying
the Yes and No options.
Yes No
Image Data If the Delete Data key is pressed when Image Data is highlighted the following
window is displayed:
Delete Data File
10000001
10000002
10000003
10000004
10000005
10000006
Software Version 6 User Manual 7.11
HOUSE KEEPING
DELETE DATA
The menu bar changes to the following:
Delete Rebuild Left Right Up Down Exit
List
The Rebuild List key updates the list of image files. This is used mainly with
host comms, where the host computer may have a more up to date list.
The Left and Right keys move the cursor between columns (if displayed).
The Up and Down keys move the cursor between the various image files.
The Delete key deletes the highlighted image file.
The Exit key returns to the previous menu.
Deviation Data If the Delete Data key is pressed when Deviation Data is highlighted, the
message ‘Confirm deletion of Deviation Data’ is displayed in the message
prompt box, asking the user to confirm the deletion request, the menu bar
changes displaying the Yes and No options.
Yes No
7.12 User Manual Software Version 6
HOUSE KEEPING
RECOVERY PROCEDURE
RECOVERY PROCEDURE
System Description The machines’ hard disk drive is partitioned to allocate both system and dynamic
disk space. System information is held on drive C: which holds all the system
software including the Windows NT operating system. The drive D: contains
the machine operating software and the dynamic (changeable) files such as
product, machine configuration and calibration.
It is the files on drive D: which need to be backed up at regular intervals to enable
the machine to be brought back into an up-to-date working state should the
Windows NT operating system or the machine software fail.
Recovery Disk DEK provide a 265 Horizon Software CD-ROM that the engineer can use to
restore the machine or the operating system software should an error occur. The
CD-ROM autoruns, on-screen prompts provide an easy route to either full or
partial recovery. The option for full or partial recovery depends upon the extent
of the system error reported and whether the engineer deems it necessary to
complete a full or partial recovery.
At the time of machine shipment, the software CD-ROM is burnt with all the
information required to operate the machine, this disk is shipped with the
machine. It should be noted that the product specific files such as [Link]
files, may have changed since the time of shipment. Files that have been
archived can be used to overwrite the files on disk D: as required.
Recovery Procedure
To perform a partial or full system recovery carry out the following:
1. Close down Windows.
2. Insert the Horizon Software CD-ROM into the machine PC CD-ROM tray.
3. Turn the mains isolator to OFF.
4. Turn the mains isolator to ON, the DEK Set-up program runs.
5. Select C on the keyboard when the message 'Press 'C' to Continue or <ESC>
to quit recovery' is displayed.
NOTE
If a current backup copy of the product and machine calibration data is not
held, carry out Steps 6 - 8 .
6. Select Option 3 - Backup Product and Calibration Data.
7. Insert a blank formatted floppy disk into the A: drive.
8. Follow the on-screen prompts and copy the machine calibration and product
files to the A: drive.
9. From the main menu, select either Option 1 to replace Windows NT partition
or Option 2 to reload the entire disk and select C on the keyboard.
10. When prompted enter machine serial number and press Return. The Ghost
program now re-writes the Windows NT partition and if selected the DEK
machine software.
11. On completion, remove the CD-ROM from the PC and reboot the machine.
12. Window NT automatically scans both partitions of the hard disk for errors.
Software Version 6 User Manual 7.13
HOUSE KEEPING
RECOVERY PROCEDURE
13. Select OK, the following window is displayed:
14. On completion the system restarts, the following window is displayed:
15. Enter the machine serial number. In the Options box, select Fixed Head,
Single Stepper and the correct camera for the type fitted to the machine.
16. Select Next, the following window is displayed:
17. Insert the diskette containing the Product and calibration data into
A: drive and press OK. The calibration data is now copied onto the
machine hard disk.
18. The machine now initializes.
19. The product files can now be copied onto the machine using Copy Data
function in Housekeeping (see Copy Data in Housekeeping Chapter).
7.14 User Manual Software Version 6
HOUSE KEEPING
FEATURE LICENSING
FEATURE LICENSING
Introduction This standalone program accessed from the taskbar, enables a user to request and
install a licence to run a new feature on the machine. The opening window lists
all the licences available on the dongle and applicable to the machine. Each
licence enabled or requested is signified by a tick beside the feature listed. The
features available on the dongle are updated at software upgrades.
Licence Request 1. Select on the taskbar, Programs and Feature License. The
following window is displayed:
Software Version 6 User Manual 7.15
HOUSE KEEPING
FEATURE LICENSING
2. Select Customer Info. The following window is displayed:
3. Enter the information required and select Save. The information is written
to a ‘[Link]’ file and attached to all licence request files, the window is
closed.
4. Scroll down the menu for the feature required. Select the feature, the
following window is displayed:
7.16 User Manual Software Version 6
HOUSE KEEPING
FEATURE LICENSING
5. Select Yes, the following window is displayed:
6. Select Proceed, a request is written to the file indicated in the window. If
successful, the following window is displayed:
NOTE
If a different destination file is required for the licence request, press ,
highlight the required file, select Open and Proceed.
7. The licence [Link] file can now be forwarded to your local DEK agent
for processing.
Software Version 6 User Manual 7.17
HOUSE KEEPING
FEATURE LICENSING
Licence Installation 1. Select on the taskbar, Programs and Feature License. The
following window is displayed:
2. Select Install Licence. The following window is displayed:
3. Using the radio buttons, select the source of the feature licence and select
Proceed.
NOTE
Carry out Steps 4 - 6 if the source of the licence is file.
Carry out Steps 7 - 9 if the source of the licence is keyboard.
7.18 User Manual Software Version 6
HOUSE KEEPING
FEATURE LICENSING
4. Select on the following window:
The following window is displayed:
5. Highlight the relevant file and select Open. Once the licence has been
accepted the following window is displayed:
6. Select Ok and Exit the program.
Software Version 6 User Manual 7.19
HOUSE KEEPING
FEATURE LICENSING
7. Select Yes on the following window:
The following window is displayed:
8. Carefully enter the 8 groups of 8 alphanumeric characters of the installation
instructions in the order specified and select Proceed. Once the licence has
been accepted the following window is displayed:
9. If further licencing instructions are to be entered, select Yes and repeat
Step 8. If not, select No and Exit the program.
7.20 User Manual Software Version 6
CHAPTER 8
2D INSPECTION
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
Introduction The vision system of the screen printing machine is used to both align the screen
to each board before it is printed and, when enabled, inspect the screen and
board. This module describes how this is achieved.
Purpose 2D inspection (2Di) ensures the quality of the print by monitoring the printing
process, to determine when a screen clean or paste dispense is required and if
licensed and selected, to warn for bridging, misalignment and reduced paste
volume. 2Di optimizes the cycle time by eliminating unnecessary screen
cleaning and paste dispensing operations. To achieve this the system inspects
various areas of the board and/or screen (sites) to detect the following:
• Screen Blockage - solder paste remaining inside screen apertures.
• Screen Smear - solder paste on the screen.
• Board: Paste on Pad - amount of the pad covered by solder paste, as a % of
the aperture size (board inspection set to basic).
• Board: Paste Present - amount of paste in the region of interest, as a % of the
aperture size (board inspection set to advanced).
• Board: Alignment - accuracy of paste positioning compared to the learnt site
image.
• Board: Bridging - distance between adjacent deposits of paste.
Using the screen aperture, blockage and paste present information the system
can calculate the following:
• Board: Paste Volume - volume of paste on the pad.
Paste Present Paste on board Paste on screen
and (bridging) (smear)
Paste Volume
Top of board Underside of screen
Board pad Paste in aperture Screen aperture
(blockage)
Figure 8-1 Paste on Board and Screen
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.1
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
Operation A Board Inspection Type and a Screen Inspection Type sets the level of
inspection for the board and screen. The following types of inspection are
available:
• None
• Basic
• Advanced
Inspection of the board and screen is licensed as a separate feature for each, and
specifies the maximum level of inspection that may be selected, as follows:
None Basic Advanced
Board No Inspection Paste on Pad Basic + Bridging and Alignment
Screen No Inspection Blockage Basic + Smear
NOTE
Paste Present = Paste on Pad + Bridging.
An item only appears in a window while it is appropriate to the current level of
inspection. In particular Paste Volume is only calculated and displayed while
the level of inspection is advanced for both the board and the screen.
Inspection is achieved by image comparison. Prior to printing, an inspection of
the various sites is carried out on the board only, and the image is captured.
This captured image, called a Pre-image is always taken as a set, so that each set
comprises a pre-image of the board at every inspection site. The set may be
taken for just the first board in a batch and applied throughout the batch
(Pre-image set to 1), or a fresh set may be taken as each board is received for
printing (Pre-image set to Every).
Regardless of the setting of Pre-image, the set always comprises all the current
inspection sites. No provision is made to enable individual sites to be selected or
excluded.
8.2 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
Screen Inspection The various screen inspections are shown below.
Screen Histogram
Aperture
Clean Screen
The position and area of apertures
within the screen site are learnt as
a reference.
Aperture
Blockage (Basic)
Paste
Any change to the area of the
aperture must be paste, hence the
percentage of blockage can be
calculated. This is relative to the
area of black lost in the
histogram.
Paste Smear (Advanced)
Any change to the area of the
screen must be paste, hence the
area of smear can be calculated.
This is relative to the area of
white lost in the histogram.
Figure 8-2 Screen Inspection
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.3
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
Board Inspection The various board inspections are shown below.
Pad
Clean Board
Board The pad on a selected board site is learnt
as a reference for comparison with
inspected sites.
Paste Paste Present (Basic)
Since the area of the pad is learnt,
and the area of paste can be recognized,
any change in pad area must be paste.
Hence the area of paste present can be
calculated.
Alignment (Advanced)
Y
The centre of the paste is compared
to the centre of the pad to produce
alignment error information in X and Y.
Bridging (Advanced)
Since the area of paste can be
recognized, the distance between
two areas of paste (bridging) can
be calculated.
Bridging Distance
Figure 8-3 Board Inspection
NOTE
Uneven tinning of the board and/or misaligned soldermask can be seen as paste,
which can cause false readings. This can be eliminated with the correct lighting
setup.
8.4 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
Shapes The inspection system uses shape recognition to inspect shapes other than
rectangles. A number of features can be inspected in one inspection, ie a row or
column of pads/apertures or a combination of features.
Column of Pads or Apertures Row of Pads or Apertures
Shape Recognition
Combination of Features
Figure 8-4 Shape Types
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.5
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
Shape Recognition To recognize shapes other than rectangles the inspection system counts the
pixels within the box graphic. By identifying which pixels have similar grey
scale levels, the system can distinguish between board and pad. An example of
how this is achieved is given below.
Pad Site Area
In the example shown the selected board site
contains a circular pad. This could be any
shape.
The board is learnt.
Graphic Box
A graphic box is drawn around the pad.
The percentage of the graphics box the pad
covers is the proportion of pad pixels against
the total graphic box pixels.
In this example the pad area = 78%
The board is printed
Paste
In the example shown the area of paste within
the graphics box = 72%.
Paste on Pad = Area of Paste Within the Graphics Box %
Area of Pad
In the example shown:
Paste on Pad = 72% = 92%
78%
Figure 8-5 Shape Recognition
8.6 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
Paste Volume 2Di uses blockage and paste on pad inspection results for a site to predict the
Prediction volume of paste on a pad, this is only available while the level of inspection is set
to advanced for both the board and screen. An example of how this is achieved is
given below.
Aperture Pad Paste on Pad
Screen Board
In the example shown the aperture is 100% clear. The paste on pad value was 100%.
This can be represented by the following model of the printed paste :
Bottom face equals area of Top face equals area of
paste on pad, ie 100%. aperture not blocked by
paste, ie 100%.
From this information the system predicts the volume of paste, in this case 100%.
In the following example the aperture has a blockage of 40%. Therefore the aperture is 60%
clear. The 60% is equal to a rectangle of the same size as shown below. The paste on pad
inspection result is 90%.
Paste (Blockage) 40% Aperture Paste (Blockage) 40% Aperture
Screen Screen
This is represented by the following model of the printed paste :
Bottom face equals area of Top face equals area of
paste on pad, ie 90%. aperture not blocked by
paste, ie 60%.
Using a complex formula 2Di predicts the volume of paste, in this case 74.48%.
Figure 8-6 Paste Volume Prediction
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.7
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
Auto Learn 2Di inspection can automatically learn different types of features as shown
below.
Site 1
Site 1 2 3
Single Site Row of Sites
3
Column of Sites
Site 1 2 3 Site 1 2 3 4
12 4
5 8
11 5
12
10 6 9
9 8 7 13 14 15 16
QFP BGA
Site 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
NOTE
When auto learning a component,
setup Site 1. 13 14 15 16
The component is learnt in the
sequences shown above. BGA Frame
Figure 8-7 Auto Learn Site Types
8.8 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
Inspection Cycles During setup, sites are given a priority of either Every Cycle (EC) or General
(G). The amount of sites inspected during each cycle is set using the min
sites/cycle parameter, this must be set to at least the amount of every cycle sites.
As the name suggests, EC sites are inspected every cycle. General sites are
inspected depending on the value of the min sites/cycle parameter and the
number of EC sites as follows:
Number of general sites inspected per cycle = Min sites/cycle parameter - EC
sites.
The general sites are inspected in rotation as shown below.
Site 1 Site 2 Site 3 Site 4 Site 5 Site 6 Site 7
EC EC G G G G G
Cycle 1 EC EC G G G
Cycle 2 EC EC G G G
Cycle 3 EC EC G G G
Cycle 4 EC EC G G G
Cycle 5 EC EC G G G
In the above example, 7 sites have been setup, with 2 given the priority of Every Cycle (EC)
and 5 given the priority of General (G). The min sites/cycle parameter is set at 5.
As there are 2 EC sites, this leaves 3 G sites to be inspected at each cycle as follows:
Cycle 1 - Sites 3, 4 and 5.
Cycle 2 - Sites 6, 7 and 3.
Cycle 3 - Sites 4, 5 and 6.
Cycle 4 - Sites 7, 3 and 4.
Cycle 5 - Sites 5, 6 and 7.
Cycle 6 - Process repeats.
Figure 8-8 Site Inspection Cycles
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.9
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
Histogram The Cognex card analyses the grey scale levels, of the pixels that make up the
site image. From this information a histogram is produced, which can be used as
a visual aid to setting up 2Di inspection.
Screen Histogram Board Histogram
Aperture Screen Board Pad
No. of Pixels No. Of Pixels
Paste Paste
Black White Black White
Grey Scale Level Grey Scale Level
Figure 8-9 Screen and Board Histograms
Lighting The lighting levels for 2Di inspection are software controlled. For a more
detailed description of the camera and optical unit refer to the Technical
Reference Manual, Camera and Vision Systems Module Chapter.
The GSX and Lt machines use either the silver or green cameras. The Horizon
and Infinity machines use only the green camera.
For the silver camera the lighting parameters and their functions are shown
below.
Camera Lighting
Inspection Lighting Parameters
Plan View Figure:
Screen Vertical 8 A
Screen Inner LR 8 B
Screen Inner FR 8 C
Screen Outer LR 8 D
Screen Outer FR 8 E A B C
Board Vertical 8 A
Board Inner LR 8 B
Board Inner FR 8 C
Board Outer LR 8 D
Board Outer FR 8 E
Window Left -1.0 D E
Window Top -1.5 Plan View of Camera Lighting LEDs
Window Width 2.0 (Board or Screen)
Window Height 2.0
Vertical Prism LED
Inner Inner
Outer Outer
Outer Outer
Inner Inner
Vertical
NOTE Prism LED
LR = Left and Right
Screen Camera Lighting (Side View) Board Camera Lighting (Side View)
FR = Front and Rear
Figure 8-10 Software Controlled Lighting - Silver Camera
8.10 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
For the green camera the lighting parameters and their functions are shown
below.
Inspection Lighting Parameters
Screen Vertical 8
Screen Oblique 8
Board Vertical 8
Board Oblique 8
Window Left -1.0
Window Top -1.5
Window Width 2.0
Window Height 2.0
Oblique Lighting LED Direct Lighting LED
Board and Screen Oblique Lighting Board and Screen Direct Lighting
Figure 8-11 Software Controlled Lighting - Green Camera
Inspection Setup Correct inspection setup is the key to effective inspection. By following the
steps of the setup sequence, shown in the summary below and the setup guide
over the page, effective inspection may be achieved.
Set Preferences
Setup
Load Product File
Edit Data
Inspect Setup
Edit Global Limit Options
Edit Limits
Edit Site Add Site
Light Setup
Inspect
Learn Site
Run Learn Board
Auto Learn
Figure 8-12 Summary of Setup
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.11
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
New Pre-image taken
Set Globals as required: Print Board:
2D Inspect Rate = 0 Step through the cycle until Place a clean
a board is printed. board into the
Exit out
Is it a good print ? machine.
Clean screen
Add Limits Sets: Inspect Site: Re-adjust Lighting:
Set wide tolerances so no Paste present data for all Adjust the LED’s to balance
alarms occur. pads are close to the same the lighting
value ?
If Board Inspect Type set to
Advance, all the paste
Add Site: toggles white or yellow on
the board ?
Name, Location Etc
Ensure all pads are within
the search box. Reset the Globals:
Auto Scale:
Set the min sites/cycle.
Determine the print closest Set 2D Inspect Rate.
Adjust Lighting: to 100% and auto scale on
that pad
Adjust so all board pads are
white with sharp edges and Run Product:
the screen is seen clearly.
Have QC Calc ?
Exit out
Learn Site / Learn Board:
SPC Data: Trial & Error:
Adjust board graphic ‘X’
and ‘Y’ accurately Collect SPC Increase the
data on the ‘limit sets’ and
More Sites to Teach ? 2Di. From use the data
this data when it alarms
Add the rest of the sites
derive the to derive the
using the same light
proper ‘limit proper
settings as this first one
sets’ settings. settings.
Re-adjust the Limit Sets:
The customer may have to
adjust these settings a few
times until the proper
values are found.
DONE
Figure 8-13 2Di Inspection Setup Guide
8.12 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
MODULE OVERVIEW
Adjustment During Most inspection parameters may be adjusted whilst a print cycle is in progress.
Print Cycle The parameters that may be adjusted are:
• Global Limits
• Limit Sets
• Site Parameters
NOTE
The site coordinate parameters are not available whilst a print cycle is in
progress.
To access the parameter adjustment menu during a print cycle select Adjust
Inspect.
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead Adjust
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste Inspect
The following window is displayed:
Global Inspect Parameters Site Parameters
2D Inspect Rate 1 Site Name IC 27 - 1
Stencil InspectType Advanced Site Priority General
Board InspectType Advanced Stencil InspectType Advanced
Pre-image Every Board InspectType Advanced
Min. Sites/Cycle 10 SiteAlignment X andY
Warning Limit 3 Limit Set ID Fine
BlockageAction Auto Paste Scaling 1.00
Blockage Clean Mode 2 Site X Coord 39.4mm
SmearAction Manual SiteYCoord 71.2mm
Smear Clean Mode 1 SiteWidth 3.00mm
Low PasteAction Re-print Site Height 4.00mm
InspectAfter Clean Enabled
Post PrintAlignment Performed
No. Sites 30
Edit Edit New Pre- Next Previous Edit Exit
Global Limits images Site Site Site
The New Pre-images button is only available if Pre-image is set to 1.
NOTE
If an error occurs when adjusting inspection parameters during a print cycle,
the adjustment page closes.
Any changes made are saved.
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.13
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
2Di SETUP
Preparation For 2Di inspection functionality the machine requires 2D Inspection to be set to
enabled.
Set Preferences 1. Select Maint.
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Select Set Prefs.
Calibrat Calibrat Calibrat House Set Diagnost Test Exit
Pressure Offset Vision Keeping Prefs Cycles
3. Set 2D inspection to enabled using the Next and Incr. keys.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
4. Ensure under screen cleaner function selected, ie Vacuum or Standard.
5. Select Exit. The message ‘Printer configuration data file saved’ is
displayed in the message prompt bar above the menu bar.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
6. Select Exit.
Calibrat Calibrat Calibrat House Set Diagnost Test Exit
Pressure Offset Vision Keeping Prefs Cycles
Load Product File 1. Select Setup.
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Select Load Data. The message ‘Use keyboard to action product search’
is displayed in the message prompt bar above the menu bar.
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
8.14 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
3. Use the Left, Right, Up and Down keys to highlight a product file. If the
product to be setup is a new one, select an existing product file and modify it.
Load Rebuild Left Right Up Down Exit
List
4. Select Load. The machine loads the product file and trains the fiducials.
Load Rebuild Left Right Up Down Exit
List
Edit Data 1. If the loaded product file is the correct one, go to Step 8. If the file needs to
be modified continue with Step 2.
2. Select Edit Data.
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The following window is displayed:
Edit Current Process Parameters
PRODUCT NAME Dek04
PRODUCT ID Dek04
DWELL HEIGHT 30 mm
DWELL SPEED 24 mm/s
SCREEN ADAPTOR NONE
SCREEN IMAGE EDGE
CUSTOM SCREEN DISABLED
BOARD WIDTH 101.5 mm
BOARD LENGTH 152.5 mm
BOARD THICKNESS 1.6 mm
PRINT SPEED 150 mm/s
FLOOD SPEED 20 mm/s
PRINT FRONT LIMIT 0.0 mm
PRINT REAR LIMIT 0.0 mm
..more
3. To change the product name; highlight product name using the Next and
Previous keys. Select Incr. type in required product name and press Enter
using the keyboard.
4. If the product name is changed the message ‘Do you also want to create a
copy of the inspection file ?’ is displayed. Select one of the following:
Yes Global No
Only
Yes - All data is copied, including the site coordinates.
Global Only - The global parameters and limits are copied.
No - No inspection file is copied. Use when setting up an inspection file for the
first time.
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.15
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
5. Using the Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys, edit the current process
parameters for the new product.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
6. Press Save.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
7. When the message ‘Board Data File Saved’ is displayed, press Exit.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
8. Select Mode until Step appears in mode option of the printer status display.
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
If the required screen is already in the printer go to Step 16.
If the screen needs to be changed continue with Step 9.
9. Select Change Screen.
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
10. When the message ‘Open Front Cover and Remove Screen’ is displayed
lift the printhead cover.
11. Remove the screen from the printer.
12. Fit the new screen into the printer ensuring the correct orientation of the
screen.
13. Lower the printhead cover.
14. Press the System button on the control console.
15. Select Change Screen.
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
16. Select Exit.
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
8.16 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
17. Select Run.
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
18. If the screen has not been changed the message ‘Screen has not been
changed for this product’ is displayed, select Use Screen to continue.
19. Select Auto Board.
Auto Manual Knead Exit
Board Board Paste
20. The message ‘Load board’ is displayed. Load board, select Confirm when
the board is loaded.
Confirm Exit
21. Setup the board and screen fiducials.
22. Select Inspect Setup. If this option is unavailable, check set prefs for 2D
Inspection enabled.
Step Open Inspect Single Exit
Cover Setup
Global Inspect Parameters Site Parameters
2D INSPECT RATE 1 SITE NAME QFP 1
STENCIL INSPECT TYPE ADVANCED SITE PRIORITY GENERAL
BOARD INSPECT TYPE ADVANCED STENCIL INSPECT TYPE ADVANCED
PRE-IMAGE EVERY BOARD INSPECT TYPE ADVANCED
MIN SITES/CYCLE 10 SITE ALIGNMENT X AND Y
WARNING LIMIT 3 LIMIT SITE I.D. FINE
BLOCKAGE ACTION MANUAL ACTION PASTE SCALING 1.00
BLOCKAGE CLEAN MODE 1 SITE X COORD 84.5 mm
SMEAR ACTION MANUAL ACTION SITE Y COORD 89.5mm
SMEAR CLEAN MODE 2 SITE WIDTH 4.00 mm
LOW PASTE ACTION RE-PRINT SITE HEIGHT 4.00 mm
INSPECT AFTER CLEAN ENABLED
POST PRINT ALIGNMENT PERFORMED
No. SITES 30
NOTE
The windows in this procedure show the parameters and options available with
both screen and board inspect type set to advanced. If screen or board inspect
type is set to basic or none, certain parameters and options are not displayed.
CAUTION
FIDUCIAL POSITION. If during the print cycle, the position of board
fiducials are changed, the position of previous inspection sites (if any) may
be affected. Small changes are automatically compensated for, however
large changes, ie more than 3mm, require sites to be repositioned.
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.17
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
Edit Global 1. Select Edit Global.
Edit Edit Delete Next Previous Edit Inspect Exit
Global Limits Site Site Site Site Site
NOTE
Delete site is only available if at least one site exists already.
Next site and previous site are only available if at least two sites exist already.
Edit Global Parameters
Stencil Inspect Type Advanced
Board Inspect Type Advanced
Pre-image Every
Min. Sites/Cycle 10
Warning Limit 3
Blockage Action Manual
Blockage Clean Mode 1
Smear Action Manual
Smear Clean Mode 2
Low Paste Action Manual
Inspect After Clean Enabled
Post Print Alignment Performed
2. Enter the parameter values below using the Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr.
keys.
Limit Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Options
• Pre-image to Every
• Min Sites to 10
• Warning Limit to 20, this can be reduced later in ‘adjust inspect’.
• Blockage Action to Manual, this can be changed later in ‘adjust inspect’.
• Smear Action to Manual, this can be changed later in ‘adjust inspect’.
A definition of all 2Di parameters and their values is given at the end of this
chapter.
On completion of successful setup, parameters can be adjusted to suit the
product.
3. Select Limit Options.
Limit Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Options
8.18 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
Global Limit Set Options
Blockage Enabled
Smear Enabled
Paste Enabled
Alignment Enabled
Bridging Enabled
Volume Enabled
These are usually set to enabled. If for any reason a particular inspection is not
required, set to disabled. If any global limit options are disabled the
corresponding limit sets and parameters are greyed out. These are global limits,
therefore they are active for the whole product. If a particular inspection is not
required for a specific type of site, this can be achieved later in limit set options.
4. Enter global limit options using Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
5. Select Exit.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
6. Select Exit.
Limit Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Options
Edit Limits 1. Select Edit Limits.
Edit Edit Delete Next Previous Edit Inspect Exit
Global Limits Site Site Site Site Site
The following window is displayed:
Limit Sets Limit Parameters
Default Limit Set ID Default
BlockageWarning 10%
BlockageAlarm 15%
SmearWarning 0.01 sq mm
SmearAlarm 0.15 sq mm
PasteWarning 90%
PasteAlarm 80%
AlignWarning 0.02 mm
AlignAlarm 0.03 mm
BridgeWarning 0.05 mm
BridgeAlarm 0.04 mm
VolumeWarning 80%
VolumeAlarm 70%
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.19
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
Limit sets list the different sets of limit parameters that are available, initially
only default is available. Limit parameters list the current limits for the
highlighted limit set.
2. At this point either:
a) Add limits to create a new limit set, continue with Add Limits below.
or
b) Edit limits to edit an existing limit set, go to Edit Limits over the page.
NOTE
It is recommended that during setup, parameters are set at a level that no alarms
occur (coarse). Once the inspection is correctly setup, the parameters can be
tightened during production in ‘adjust inspect’.
Add Limits 1. Select Add Limits.
Add Edit Next Previous Exit
Limits Limits Limit Limit
NOTE
Next limit and previous limit are only available if at least one limit, plus the
default, exist already.
2. Use the keyboard to enter the ID of the new limit set and press Enter.
NOTE
Limit ID may be any name up to 20 characters in length including spaces.
Edit Limit Parameters
Limit Set ID COARSE
BlockageWarning 20
BlockageAlarm 25
SmearWarning 1.00 sq mm
SmearAlarm 1.50 sq mm
PasteWarning 70
PasteAlarm 65
AlignWarning 0.200 mm
AlignAlarm 0.250 mm
BridgeWarning 0.015 mm
BridgeAlarm 0.010 mm
VolumeWarning 80
VolumeAlarm 70
3. Enter parameters using the Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys. A coarse
set of values is shown above.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Limits
8.20 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
4. Select Save Limits.
The message ‘Saving Fiducial Data - Please Wait
Board data file saved’ is displayed.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Limits
5. Select Exit.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Limits
6. Select Edit Limits.
Add Edit Next Previous Exit
Limits Limits Limit Limit
7. Go to Step 3 of Edit Limits (below).
Edit Limits 1. Select Edit Limits.
Add Edit Next Previous Exit
Limits Limits Limit Limit
The following window is displayed:
Edit Limit Parameters
Limit Set ID COARSE
BlockageWarning 20
BlockageAlarm 25
SmearWarning 1.00 sq mm
SmearAlarm 1.50 sq mm
PasteWarning 70
PasteAlarm 65
AlignWarning 0.200 mm
AlignAlarm 0.250 mm
BridgeWarning 0.015 mm
BridgeAlarm 0.010 mm
VolumeWarning 80
VolumeAlarm 70
2. Enter parameters using the Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys. A coarse
set of values is shown above.
Limit Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Options Limits
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.21
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
3. Select Limit Options.
Limit Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Options Limits
Site Limit Set Options
Blockage Enabled
Smear Enabled
Paste Enabled
Alignment Enabled
Bridging Enabled
Volume Enabled
These are usually set to enabled. If for any reason a particular inspection is not
required, set to disabled. If any global limit set options are disabled the
corresponding parameters are greyed out. These are limit set options, therefore
they are only active for this particular limit set. If a particular inspection is not
required for the whole product, this can be achieved in global limit options,
under edit globals, earlier in this chapter.
If either blockage or paste is set to disabled, volume is also disabled. Once
volume is disabled by this method it is not automatically enabled should both
blockage and paste be re-enabled. Volume must be selected and set to enabled.
4. Enter limit set options using Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
5. Select Exit.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
6. Select Save Limits.
The message ‘Saving Fiducial Data - Please Wait
Board data file saved’ is displayed.
Limit Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Options Limits
7. Select Exit.
Limit Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Options Limits
8. Select Exit.
Add Edit Next Previous Exit
Limits Limits Limit Limit
8.22 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
Edit Site 1. Select Edit Site. The edit site parameters window is displayed and the site
name parameter is highlighted.
Edit Edit Delete Next Previous Edit Inspect Exit
Global Limits Site Site Site Site Site
NOTE
Delete site is only available if at least one site exists already. Next site and
previous site are only available if at least two sites exist already.
Edit Site Parameters
SITE NAME SITE 1
SITE PRIORITY GENERAL
STENCIL INSPECT TYPE ADVANCED
BOARD INSPECT TYPE ADVANCED
SITE ALIGNMENT X and Y
LIMIT SET ID COARSE
PASTE SCALING 1.00
SITE X COORD 80.4 mm
SITE Y COORD 86.4 mm
SITE WIDTH 2.00 mm
SITE HEIGHT 2.00 mm
SCREEN GRAPHIC WHITE
SCREEN GRAPHIC X 0.00 mm
SCREEN GRAPHIC Y 0.00 mm
BOARD GRAPHIC BLACK
BOARD GRAPHIC X 0.00 mm
BOARD GRAPHIC Y 0.00 mm
NOTE
Screen graphic and board graphic are only relevant to GSX/Lt machines.
2. Select Add Site. The cursor flashes along side the site name parameter.
Add Learn Light Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Site Site Setup
Edit Site Parameters
SITE NAME
SITE PRIORITY GENERAL
STENCIL INSPECT TYPE ADVANCED
BOARD INSPECT TYPE ADVANCED
SITE ALIGNMENT X and Y
LIMIT SET ID COARSE
PASTE SCALING 1.00
SITE X COORD 80.4 mm
SITE Y COORD 86.4 mm
SITE WIDTH 2.00 mm
SITE HEIGHT 2.00 mm
SCREEN GRAPHIC WHITE
SCREEN GRAPHIC X 0.00 mm
SCREEN GRAPHIC Y 0.00 mm
BOARD GRAPHIC BLACK
BOARD GRAPHIC X 0.00 mm
BOARD GRAPHIC Y 0.00 mm
3. Use the keyboard to enter the site name and press Enter.
NOTE
Site name may be any name up to 20 characters in length including spaces.
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.23
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
4. Enter parameters using the Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys.
Learn Light Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Site Setup
5. Highlight site limit ID using the Next and Previous keys.
Learn Light Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Site Setup
6. Select Incr.
Learn Light Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Site Setup
Limit Sets
DEFAULT
FINE
COARSE
7. Using Next Limit or Previous Limit keys, highlight the coarse limit set
created in either add limits or edit limits.
Use Next Previous Exit
Limit Limit Limit
8. Select Use Limit.
Use Next Previous Exit
Limit Limit Limit
9. Measure the X and Y dimensions of the required site from the board or
screen.
NOTE
For the initial setup of 2Di use a single site. After the setup is complete add auto
learn features if required.
8.24 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
10. Set site X coord and site Y coord, using the Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr.
keys, to display the site on the monitor. Adjust site width, site height, screen
grahic (if applicable), site X coord, and site Y coord, using the Next,
Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys, to position the site graphic over the screen,
as shown.
Learn Light Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Site Setup
Site Site
Width Width
Board Site Screen Site
Site Site Site
Height Height Y Coord
Movement
Site Site
X Coord X Coord
Movement Movement
NOTE
Adjust the site height and site width so that the board site is large enough to
cover the pads.
Lighting Setup 1. Select Light Setup.
Learn Light Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Site Setup
Inspection Lighting Parameters
Screen Vertical 8
Screen Oblique 8
Board Vertical 8
Board Oblique 8
Window Left -1.5 mm
Window Top -1.5 mm
Window Width 3.0 mm
Window Height 3.0 mm
Figure 8-14 Lighting Parameters - Green Camera
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.25
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
Camera Lighting
Inspection Lighting Parameters
Plan View Figure:
Screen Vertical 8 A
Screen Inner LR 8 B
Screen Inner FR 8 C
Screen Outer LR 8 D
Screen Outer FR 8 E A B C
Board Vertical 8 A
Board Inner LR 8 B
Board Inner FR 8 C
Board Outer LR 8 D
Board Outer FR 8 E
Window Left -1.0 D E
Window Top -1.5 Plan View of Camera Lighting LEDs
Window Width 2.0 (Board or Screen)
Window Height 2.0
Vertical Prism LED
Inner Inner
Outer Outer
Outer Outer
Inner Inner
Vertical
NOTE Prism LED
LR = Left and Right
Screen Camera Lighting (Side View) Board Camera Lighting (Side View)
FR = Front and Rear
Figure 8-15 Lighting Parameters - Silver Camera
2. Using the Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys, adjust the lighting
parameters to a level whereby the screen and board pads are just whiting out,
without blooming, default level 8 is usually adequate for the majority of
setups.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
3. For machines with a green camera go to Step 6. For machines with a silver
camera continue with Step 4.
4. Adjust the set light graphic using the window left, window top, window
width and window height parameters to surround the feature providing 50%
black and 50% white.
Board Pad Aperture
Set Light
Histogram Graphic
Top of Board Underside of Screen
8.26 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
5. Ensure the lighting histogram has a good definition of grey scale levels, as
shown below.
Lighting parameters correctly set
6. Select Exit.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Learn Site 1. Select Learn Site.
Add Learn Light Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Site Site Setup
Dependent upon the 2D inspect type selected, the ‘Screen Learnt’ message is
displayed in the message prompt bar above the menu bar. The apertures within
the site are enclosed by individual graphic boxes, as shown over the page. If
‘....Screen Not Learnt’ is displayed, adjust the site parameters and re-learn the
site.
2. Using the Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. keys adjust the board graphic X
and board graphic Y coordinates to achieve graphic alignment on the board.
Learn ReLearn Auto Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Board Screen Learn
3. Select Learn Board.
Learn ReLearn Auto Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Board Screen Learn
4. The message ‘Board Learnt’ is displayed in the message prompt bar above
the menu bar. If ‘....Board Not Learnt’ is displayed, edit the site parameters
and re-learn the site.
NOTE
1. If the size of the graphic box for the site is altered, the screen has to be
re-learnt and this step repeated.
2. Exiting without learning, loses the edited information.
3. The number of pads must equal the number of apertures for a successful site.
4. Adjust the board graphic X and board graphic Y accurately, as this is used as
a reference for alignment measurements.
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.27
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
The site learnt graphics appear around the screen aperture and on the board pads
confirming that the site is learnt. If necessary, adjust the mirror image board site
graphic over the corresponding pad.
Board site learnt box Screen site learnt box
5. Select Exit.
Learn ReLearn Auto Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Board Screen Learn
6. Select Exit.
Add Learn Light Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Site Site Setup
8.28 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
Inspect 1. Select Inspect Site.
Edit Edit Delete Next Previous Edit Inspect Exit
Global Limits Site Site Site Site Site
NOTE
Delete site,next site and previous site may not be displayed if other sites do not
exist.
The following window is displayed:
Inspection Results
SITE NAME SITE 1
Maximum Blockage 0% PASS
Smear Area 0.0 sq mm PASS
Minimum Paste 0% ALARM
X Alignment ---- INVALID
Y Alignment ---- INVALID
Bridging +10.00mm PASS
Minimum Paste Volume 0% ALARM
Bridge Warnings 0
Bridge Alarms 0
No. Blockage Paste Present Volume AlignX AlignY
1 0% 0% 0% ---- ----
2 0% 0% 0% ---- ----
2. If the screen and board were clean, the maximum blockage, smear area and
minimum paste should all be zero. If readings are incorrect, repeat from
Lighting Setup and re-inspect.
3. Select Exit.
Auto Toggle Next Previous Save Exit
Scale Paste Image
4. Select Exit.
Edit Edit Delete Edit Inspect Exit
Global Limit Site Site Site
5. Select Step until the board is printed.
Step Inspect Single Exit
Setup
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.29
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
6. Select Step until inspect setup is displayed.
Step Single Exit
7. Select Inspect Setup.
Step Inspect Single Exit
Setup
8. Select Inspect Site.
Edit Edit Delete Next Previous Edit Inspect Exit
Global Limits Site Site Site Site Site
The following window is displayed:
Inspection Results
SITE NAME SITE 1
Maximum Blockage 0% PASS
Smear Area 0.00 sq mm PASS
Minimum Paste 94% PASS
X Alignment +0.007mm PASS
Y Alignment -0.003mm PASS
Bridging 5.012mm PASS
Minimum Paste Volume 93% PASS
Bridge Warnings 0
Bridge Alarms 0
No. Blockage Paste Present Volume AlignX AlignY
1 0% 94% 93% +0.007 -0.003
2 0% 98% 97% +0.006 -0.002
NOTE
A reliable paste present reading is made only when the lighting is set correctly.
9. If the board inspection type is set to advanced carry out Steps 9a and 9b. If
the board inspection type is set to none or basic carry out Step 9c.
9a. Select Toggle Paste.
Auto Toggle Next Previous Save Exit
Scale Paste Image
NOTE
Selecting toggle paste either shows or hides the paste display overlay onto the
monitor. The toggle paste facility on the board image is only functional with the
board inspection type set to advanced. Toggling paste on the screen is only
available on Horizon and Infinity machines and only with the screen inspect type
set to basic or advanced.
8.30 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
9b. Ensure that the paste display overlay coincides with the presence of paste. If
this is correct go to Step 20. If this is incorrect, note the position of the
non-existant paste and continue with Step 10.
NOTE
If the paste display overlay coincides with the presence of paste, any poor
inspection results are due to process problems and not 2Di setup.
9c. Ensure that the inspection results are consistent with the amount of paste on
the pad. If this is correct go to Step 20. If this is incorrect continue with
Step 10.
10. Select Exit.
Auto Toggle Next Previous Save Exit
Scale Paste Image
11. Select Edit Site.
Edit Edit Delete Next Previous Edit Inspect Exit
Global Limits Site Site Site Site Site
12. Select Light Setup.
Add Learn Light Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Site Site Setup
13. Adjust the lighting parameters to improve the lighting conditions in the
suspect areas.
14. Select Exit.
Record Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Image
15. Select Exit.
Add Learn Light Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Site Site Setup
16. Select Exit.
Edit Edit Delete Next Previous Edit Inspect Exit
Global Limits Site Site Site Site Site
17. Select Step to remove the board from the machine.
Step Inspect Single Exit
Setup
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.31
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
18. Load a clean board onto the rails and clean the screen.
19. Repeat Steps 5-9.
20. Select Auto Scale.
Auto Toggle Next Previous Save Exit
Scale Paste Image
Selecting auto scale automatically adjusts the paste scaling value for the current
site, to cause the value of paste present, on the pad currently selected in the
inspection result list, to be reported as 100%. The inspection results window is
updated accordingly. If the calculated value for paste scaling falls outside the
range of allowable values, an error window is displayed and the paste scaling
value is set to the limit nearest the calculated value. However, if the currently
selected paste present value is zero, no adjustment of the paste scaling value
takes place and an error window is displayed. A prompt is displayed giving the
new scaling factor value each time it is changed. The auto scale button is only
present if board inspection is being performed.
21. Select Exit.
Auto Toggle Next Previous Save Exit
Scale Paste Image
22. Select Step to remove the board from the machine.
Step Inspect Single Exit
Setup
23. Clean the board and screen.
24. Run through the print cycle in step mode until inspect setup is displayed.
25. Select Inspect Setup.
Step Inspect Single Exit
Setup
8.32 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
26. Carry out Section Edit Site and create all required sites, using the same
lighting parameters as before (see Auto Learn).
NOTE
For the silver camera only, if the new sites pads and/or apertures are at 90
degrees to the original pads and/or apertures, interchange the lighting
parameters inner LR with inner FR and outer LR with outer FR, on the board
and/or screen, as shown below.
Original Site New Site
Inspection Lighting Parameters Inspection Lighting Parameters
Screen Vertical 8 Screen Vertical 8
Screen Inner LR 9 Screen Inner LR 10
Screen Inner FR 10 Screen Inner FR 9
Screen Outer LR 11 Screen Outer LR 12
Screen Outer FR 12 Screen Outer FR 11
Board Vertical 8 Board Vertical 8
Board Inner LR 9 Board Inner LR 10
Board Inner FR 10 Board Inner FR 9
Board Outer LR 11 Board Outer LR 12
Board Outer FR 12 Board Outer FR 11
27. On completion carry out Section Inspect.
28. Set the required 2D inspect rate and the Min site/cycle parameters in edit
global.
29. This completes the 2Di setup. Commence print run in auto mode.
NOTE
During production use adjust inspect to fine tune the inspection process.
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.33
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
Auto Learn Prior to carrying out auto learn, the 2Di setup described in the preceding pages,
must have been carried out.
1. From the Section Auto Learn, under Module Overview, at the front of this
chapter, identify the position of Site 1 for the required feature.
2. Carry out Section Edit Site for Site 1 coordinates.
3. Carry out Sub Section Lighting Setup, using the same parameters as
previous.
4. Carry out Sub Section Learn Site paras 1-4.
5. Select Auto Learn.
Learn ReLearn Auto Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Board Screen Learn
The message ‘Select Component type to Auto Learn:’ is displayed. The
following messages appear beneath this message in rotation:
‘Row - Start at left most end of horizontal’
‘Col - Start at topmost end of vertical’
‘QFP - (Quad Flat Pack) - Start at left most end of top horizontal line’
‘BGA - (Ball Grid Array) - Start at top left corner of array’
‘BGA Frame - Start at top left corner of array frame’
6. Select required component to learn.
Learn Learn Learn Learn Learn Abort
Row Column QFP BGA BGA Frame
The message bar reports the progress of the auto learn as a set of sites of the
appropriate type are created and learnt. The original site, and each site that is
created, is given the same name as the original site, but with a ‘~’ symbol
followed by a three digit number in sequence. While creation and learning is in
progress the following menu bar is displayed:
Abort
Auto Learn
As each new site is created and learnt, the newly created name and data is
displayed in the Edit Site Parameters window.
If Abort Auto Learn is selected the message ‘Site creation and learning
interrupted; do you want to . . . is displayed. The following menu bar is
displayed:
Abandon Continue
If Abandon is selected any sites that have been created are deleted. If Continue is
selected the auto learn resumes, creating and learning sites.
8.34 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
7. On completion of a successful auto learn of the selected component, the
following menu bar is displayed:
Edit Edit Delete Next Previous Edit Inspect Exit
Global Limits Site Site Site Site Site
8. Repeat Steps 1 to 7 for further auto learn features.
9. While creating and learning the sites for a device, if a site is not positioned
correctly for learning, the following menu bar is displayed:
Adjust Learn Learn Continue Exit
Site Board Screen
10. Select Adjust Site. The learn site parameters window is displayed.
Adjust Learn Learn Continue Exit
Site Board Screen
Learn Site Parameters
SITE X COORD 52.0 mm
SITE Y COORD 36.5 mm
SITE WIDTH 2.00 mm
SITE HEIGHT 2.00 mm
SCREEN GRAPHIC X -0.01 mm
SCREEN GRAPHIC Y -0.01 mm
BOARD GRAPHIC X 0.00 mm
BOARD GRAPHIC Y 0.00 mm
11. Adjust site parameters as required using Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr.
keys.
Continue Learn Learn Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Board Screen
12. Select Learn Screen.
Continue Learn Learn Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Board Screen
13. The message ‘Screen Learnt’ is displayed. If the message ‘....Screen Not
Learnt’ is displayed, edit the site parameters and select Learn Screen.
14. Select Learn Board.
Continue Learn Learn Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Board Screen
15. The message ‘Board Learnt’ is displayed. If the message ‘....Board Not
Learnt’ is displayed, edit the site parameters and select Learn Board.
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.35
2Di INSPECTION
2Di SETUP
16. Select Continue.
Continue Learn Learn Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Board Screen
17. Select Continue. The auto learn process continues.
Adjust Learn Learn Continue Exit
Site Board Screen
The message bar reports the progress of the auto learn as the system searches for
a site, learns a site and moves to the next site.
18. On completion of a successful auto learn of the selected component, the
following menu bar is displayed:
Edit Edit Delete Next Previous Edit Inspect Exit
Global Limits Site Site Site Site Site
19. Carry out Section Inspect for all sites.
8.36 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
SETUP TIPS
SETUP TIPS
Problem Solution
No inspection Setup available Ensure that 2Di inspection is enabled in Set Prefs.
System not inspecting or The 2D inspect rate may equal 0.
inspection cycle not being
carried out
Order of Inspection If a particular sequence of site inspection is required, the sites should be
selected as every cycle sites and setup in the sequence required. Every
cycle sites are inspected in the order that they were setup. General sites
are inspected in an order that depends on their position and their
inspection sequence cannot be set. If at a later date a site is edited the
sequence is affected.
Screen and Board - Cleaning Before 2Di inspection setup, ensure the screen and board being used
Before Setup have been thoroughly cleaned and are free of all paste deposits. If either
are not cleaned thoroughly any remaining smearing, partially blocked
apertures or paste on the board may cause an incorrect setup.
Site Area Accuracy Ensure that when setting site parameters (height, width etc.), the site
graphic is placed around the site to give clearance from the apertures
and pads and to prevent other areas being inspected.
Lighting Conditions If the inspection result is not as expected, it is possible that the site was
learnt under different lighting conditions. This problem may be
resolved by re-learning the site under new lighting conditions, or by the
use of paste scaling for paste present adjustment.
Site Quality The sites selected for inspection should be of good quality. Sites should
not have rounded or chamfered edges or uneven or excessive tinning,
this can lead to misleading results when attempting to learn sites.
Sites Being Lost Ensure that both board and screen have been learnt. After adjusting
board or screen site parameters always learn both, further editing can be
done at a later stage. The number of pads must equal the number of
apertures for a successful site.
Inspection alarms too frequent This may be a symptom of limits being set too tight. Relax the limits so
and unnecessary that results of an acceptable print produce pass or warning, not alarm, or
use the global limit option or limit options to disable the particular limit
checking.
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.37
2Di INSPECTION
OPTIONS AFTER AN INSPECTION ALARM
OPTIONS AFTER AN INSPECTION ALARM
The machine stops at the first inspection alarm. When an inspection alarm
occurs, several menu bar options become available.
Accept Inspect Recovery Adjust Inspect Adjust Reject
More Action All Inspect
The options carry out the following functions:
Accept Selecting this option clears the alarm panel, changes the beacon back to green
and feeds the board through the machine.
Inspect More Selecting this option clears the alarm panel, changes the beacon back to green
and allows the inspection sequence to continue, until it either completes
inspection or raises another alarm.
Recovery Action Selecting this option displays the following menu:
Paste Clean Clean Re-print Exit
Load Mode 1 Mode 2 Board
The user prompt text shows the following lines:
‘Clean Mode 1 : XXXX’
‘Clean Mode 2 : YYYY’
Where XXXX and YYYY are the descriptions of the clean mode settings, ie
‘WVWD’ for wet, vac, wet, dry.
Paste Load Selecting this option initiates a paste load cycle, if a paste dispenser is fitted or
enables paste to be loaded manually.
Clean Mode 1 and 2 Selecting either clean mode 1 or clean mode 2 initiates the screen clean cycle set
up for that mode.
Re-print Board Selecting this option clears the alarm panel and changes the beacon back to
green. The board is re-printed and the inspection sequence is started again from
the begining. All the existing alarm information is cleared.
NOTE
The Re-print Board button is not available if the current board has already been
re-printed.
Adjust Selecting this option allows the adjustment of process parameters.
8.38 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
OPTIONS AFTER AN INSPECTION ALARM
Inspect All Selecting this option clears the alarm panel and changes the beacon back to
green. The inspection sequence is restarted from the beginning. All the existing
alarm information is cleared.
Adjust Inspect Selecting this option displays the following menu:
Edit Edit New Pre- Edit Inspect Exit
Global Limits images Site Site
Edit Global Selecting this option opens the edit global parameters window, allowing
parameters that are used throughout the inspection to be altered.
Edit Limits Selecting this option opens the limit sets window, allowing a set of limit
parameters to be selected and altered.
New Pre-images Selecting this option initiates a pre-print inspection on the next print cycle to
capture the new pre-images. The message ‘New pre-images will be collected
next print cycle’ is displayed.
NOTE
The New Pre-image button is only available if pre-image is set to 1.
Edit Site Selecting this option opens the site parameters window, allowing adjustment of
the site specific parameters.
Inspect Site Selecting this option opens the inspection results window and displays the
following menu:
Auto Toggle Next Previous Exit
Scale Paste
Selecting Next or Previous moves the highlight up and down the list of site pads.
Selecting Toggle Paste either shows or hides the paste display overlay onto the
monitor. The toggle paste facility on the board image is only functional with the
board inspection type set to advanced. Toggling paste on the screen is only
available on Horizon and Infinity machines and only with the screen inspect type
set to basic or advanced.
Selecting Auto Scale automatically adjusts the paste scaling value for the
current site, to cause the value of paste present, on the pad currently selected in
the inspection result list, to be reported as 100%. This is used where the site pad
causing the alarm is actually a good print.
Reject Selecting this option clears the alarm panel and the board is fed to the output end
of the rail system and held there.
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.39
2Di INSPECTION
IMAGE RECORDING
IMAGE RECORDING
Selecting Save Image saves the inspection object data using the save object
command. This option is only available if image recording in set preferences is
set to VP or PC disk. If the image recording is set to VP disk, the file name is
[Link], where nnn is the next sequence number to save. If the image
recording is set to PC disk, the file name is [Link], where n is a number
cycling from 1 to 5. The first image saved after initialization is [Link]. Files
are overwritten without warning.
NOTE
VP disk saves to the Cognex HD if fitted. It is recommended to use PC disk only
for image recording.
8.40 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
MENU PARAMETERS
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
2D Inspect Rate This parameter sets the number of print cycles between inspection cycles,
with zero indicating no inspection.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 100
Increments - 1
Default - 0
Stencil Inspect Type This parameter sets the extent of the screen inspection. The options are:
None
Basic
Advanced
Default - Basic
Board Inspect Type This parameter sets the extent of the board inspection. The options are:
None
Basic
Advanced
Default - Basic
Pre-image This parameter sets when a pre-image is taken. The options are:
One - The first board only
Every - Every board
Default - One
Min Sites/Cycle This parameter sets the number of sites to inspect every cycle.
Minimum - Number of Every Cycle sites
Maximum - Total number of sites
Increments - 1
Default - Number of every cycle sites
Warning Limit This parameter determines how many consecutive warnings on the same
site constitute an alarm.
Minimum - 1
Maximum - 20
Increments - 1
Default - 3
Blockage Action This parameter sets the action performed on a blockage alarm. The
options are:
Manual
Automatic
Default - Manual
Blockage Clean This parameter sets the type of screen clean performed on blockage
alarm. The options are:
Mode 1
Mode 2
Default - Mode 1
Smear Action This parameter sets the action performed on a smear alarm. The options
are:
Manual Action
Automatic
Default - Manual
Smear Clean This parameter sets the type of screen clean performed on a smear alarm.
The options are:
Mode 1
Mode 2
Default - Mode 2
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.41
2Di INSPECTION
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Low Paste Action This parameter sets the action performed on a low paste alarm. The
options are:
Manual
Re-print
Default - Manual
Inspect After Clean This parameter sets whether a screen is inspected before the next board is
printed following a screen clean. The options are:
Disabled
Enabled
Default - Disabled
Post Print Alignment This parameter sets whether post print alignment is carried out. The
options are:
Not Performed
Performed
Default - Not Performed
No. Sites This parameter displays the total number of sites.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 500
Increments - 1
Default - 0
Site Name The unique uppercase name given to a site for identification and which
cannot be mistaken for the name of a created site. The name can have a
maximum of 20 characters.
Site Priority This parameter determines the priority of a site. Where the site is part of
a device, the value applies to the whole device. The options are:
Not Inspected
General
Every Cycle
Default - Every Cycle
Site Alignment This parameter sets what alignment data is reported for each site. The
options are:
X&Y
X Only
Y Only
None
Default - None
Limit Set ID The unique uppercase name given to a set of limits which can be applied
to any site. This enables different sites to be inspected according to
different limits. The name can have a maximum of 20 characters. A
maximum of 14 limit sets can be created.
Paste Scaling This parameter enables adjustment of the paste scaling value for the
current site, to cause the value of paste present on the pad, currently
selected in the inspection list, to be reported as 100%. This parameter is
used in conjunction with the Auto Scale function.
Minimum - 0.01
Maximum - 2.00
Increments - 0.01
Default - 1
Site X Coord The coordinate of a site taken from the front left corner of the board, in
the X direction.
Minimum - 0.0mm
Maximum - Board Length
Increments - 0.1mm
Default - 164.1mm
8.42 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Site Y Coord The coordinate of a site taken from the front left corner of the board, in
the Y direction.
Minimum - 0.0mm
Maximum - Board Width
Increments - 0.1mm
Default - 59.5mm
Site Width The width of the site to be inspected.
Minimum - 0.5mm
Maximum - 4.0mm
Increments - 0.01mm
Default - 0.7mm
Site Height The height of the site to be inspected.
Minimum - 0.5mm
Maximum - 6.5mm
Increments - 0.01mm
Default - 4mm
Blockage Warning This parameter sets the amount of aperture blockage required to initiate a
warning.
Minimum - 0%
Maximum - 100%
Increments - 1%
Default - 10%
Blockage Alarm This parameter sets the amount of aperture blockage required to initiate
an alarm.
Minimum - 0%
Maximum - 100%
Increments - 1%
Default - 20%
Smear Warning This parameter sets the amount of screen smear required to initiate a
warning.
Minimum - 0.01 sq. mm
Maximum - 10 sq. mm
Increments - 0.01 sq. mm
Default - 0.1 sq. mm
Smear Alarm This parameter sets the amount of screen smear required to initiate an
alarm.
Minimum - 0.01 sq. mm
Maximum - 10 sq. mm
Increments - 0.01 sq. mm
Default - 0.2 sq. mm
Paste warning This parameter sets the amount of paste on pad required to initiate a
warning.
Minimum - 0%
Maximum - 100%
Increments - 1%
Default - 90%
Paste Alarm This parameter sets the amount of paste on pad required to initiate an
alarm.
Minimum - 0%
Maximum - 100%
Increments - 1%
Default - 80%
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.43
2Di INSPECTION
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Align Warning This parameter sets the amount of X or Y alignment error of the paste to
initiate a warning.
Minimum - 0.005mm
Maximum - 0.25mm
Increments - 0.001mm
Default - 0.025mm
Align Alarm This parameter sets the amount of X or Y alignment error of the paste to
initiate an alarm.
Minimum - 0.005mm
Maximum - 0.25mm
Increments - 0.001mm
Default - 0.03mm
Bridge Warning This parameter sets the distance between adjacent deposits of paste that if
not exceeded initiates a warning.
Minimum - 0.01mm
Maximum - 0.5mm
Increments - 0.005mm
Default - 0.05mm
Bridge Alarm This parameter sets the distance between adjacent deposits of paste that if
not exceeded initiates an alarm.
Minimum - 0.01mm
Maximum - 0.5mm
Increments - 0.005mm
Default - 0.04mm
Volume Warning This parameter sets the volume of paste on pad required to initiate a
warning.
Minimum - 0%
Maximum - 100%
Increments - 1%
Default - 80%
Volume Alarm This parameter sets the volume of paste on pad required to initiate an
alarm.
Minimum - 0%
Maximum - 100%
Increments - 1%
Default - 70%
Screen Graphic This parameter sets the colour of the graphic box drawn around the
screen site. The options are:
Black
White
Default - Black
This parameter has no function on the Horizon and Infinity machines.
Screen Graphic X The position of the inspection window. This parameter is used to finely
adjust the inspection window in the X direction, any adjustment made
affects the site X coord parameter.
Minimum - -3.5mm
Maximum - 3.5mm
Increments - 0.01mm
Default - 0mm
Screen Graphic Y The position of the inspection window. This parameter is used to finely
adjust the inspection window in the Y direction, any adjustment made
affects the site Y coord parameter.
Minimum - -3.5mm
Maximum - 3.5mm
Increments - 0.01mm
Default - 0mm
8.44 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Board Graphic This parameter sets the colour of the graphic box drawn around the board
site. The options are:
Black
White
Default - White
This parameter has no function on the Horizon and Infinity machines.
Board Graphic X The position of the inspection window. This parameter is used to finely
adjust the inspection window in the X direction, any adjustment made
affects the site X coord parameter.
Minimum - -3.5mm
Maximum - 3.5mm
Increments - 0.01mm
Default - 0mm
Board Graphic Y The position of the inspection window. This parameter is used to finely
adjust the inspection window in the Y direction, any adjustment made
affects the site Y coord parameter.
Minimum - -3.5mm
Maximum - 3.5mm
Increments - 0.01mm
Default - 0mm
Window Left This parameter sets the position of the window relative to the centre of
the image.
The Minimum and Maximum values are calculated from the vision
calibration and vary from machine to machine.
Increments - 0.1mm
Default - -1.5mm
Window Top This parameter sets the position of the window relative to the centre of
the image.
The Minimum and Maximum values are calculated from the vision
calibration and vary from machine to machine.
Increments - 0.1mm
Default - -1.5mm
Window Width This parameter sets the width of the inspection window.
The Minimum and Maximum values are calculated from the vision
calibration and vary from machine to machine.
Increments - 0.1mm
Default - 3mm
Window Height This parameter sets the height of the inspection window.
The Minimum and Maximum values are calculated from the vision
calibration and vary from machine to machine.
Increments - 0.1mm
Default - 3mm
Screen Vertical This parameter sets the level of screen vertical light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
Board Vertical This parameter sets the level of board vertical light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.45
2Di INSPECTION
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Screen Oblique This parameter sets the level of screen oblique light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
This parameter is for the green camera only.
Board Oblique This parameter sets the level of board oblique light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
This parameter is for the green camera only.
Screen Inner LR This parameter sets the level of screen inner left/right light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
This parameter is for the silver camera only.
Screen Inner FR This parameter sets the level of screen inner front/rear light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
This parameter is for the silver camera only.
Screen Outer LR This parameter sets the level of screen outer left/right light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
This parameter is for the silver camera only.
Screen Outer FR This parameter sets the level of screen outer front/rear light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
This parameter is for the silver camera only.
Board Inner LR This parameter sets the level of board inner left/right light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
This parameter is for the silver camera only.
Board Inner FR This parameter sets the level of board inner front/rear light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
This parameter is for the silver camera only.
Board Outer LR This parameter sets the level of board outer left/right light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
This parameter is for the silver camera only.
8.46 User Manual Software Version 6
2Di INSPECTION
MENU PARAMETERS
Parameter Definition
Board Outer FR This parameter sets the level of board outer front/rear light.
Minimum - 0
Maximum - 15
Increments - 1
Default - 8
This parameter is for the silver camera only.
Limit Set Options This parameter enables the output of these inspections.
Blockage
Smear
Paste
Alignment
Bridging
Volume
Software Version 6 User Manual 8.47
2Di INSPECTION
MENU PARAMETERS
8.48 User Manual Software Version 6
CHAPTER 9
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
INTRODUCTION
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the general replenishment processes needed for machine
husbandry. It details the procedures needed to perform the following tasks:
• Solder paste replenishment.
• Paper and solvent replenishment - Blue USC
• Cleaning cassette and solvent replenishment - Vortex USC
• Filter cassette replenishment - Vortex USC
• Fitment of squeegees
• ProFlow cassette change
• ProFlow - paste retention system replacement
• ProFlow - transfer head recharging
Regulations The safety and environmental aspects of machine operation are described.
However, it should be noted that local or national regulations may vary for
countries outside the UK or EEC. Machine operatives should be conversant
with all regulations relating to local conditions.
Competence Level These procedures can only be performed by personnel who have been trained to
a minimum of DEK operator level.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.1
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
PASTE LOADING Two options are provided for loading paste onto the screen, Manual Load and
Auto Dispense. Manual load allows the operator to load paste by hand onto the
stencil. Auto dispense loads paste automatically onto the stencil in the correct
area, from the paste cartridge located in the paste dispenser on the print carriage.
Auto dispense can be programmed into a product file to take place automatically
during a print run or either option can be selected, directly from the MMI, to take
place at the operators discretion.
The print direction option allows the user to select the direction of the next print
stroke after paste loading. The option is available prior to pressing Run in all
machine modes, ie Auto/Single/Stop.
WARNING
SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENTS. WHEN USING OR HANDLINGANY
S O L D E R PA S T E O R S O LV E N T F O R M U L AT I O N T H E
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE STRICTLYADHERED TO.
WARNING
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. APPROVED PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENT HANDLERS
AT ALL TIMES TO ELIMINATE FUME INHALATION, EYE
CONTACT, SKIN CONTACTAND INGESTION.
Manual Loading To load paste prior to print run:
1. Press Paste Load (F3).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Press Manual Load (F2).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
The message ‘Open cover and load paste’ is displayed.
9.2 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
3. Open the front printhead cover.
4. Load the solder paste onto the screen.
5. Close the front printhead cover.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.3
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
6. Press the System button.
7. Press Continue (F1).
Continue
8. Press Exit (F8).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
To Load Paste
During A Print Run 1. Press Paste Load (F3).
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste
2. Press Manual Load (F2).
Auto Manual Print Exit
Dispense Load Directn
The message ‘Open cover and load paste’ is displayed.
3. Open the front printhead cover.
9.4 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
4. Load paste onto screen.
5. Close the front printhead cover.
6. Press the System button.
7. Press Continue (F1).
Continue
8. Press Exit (F8).
Auto Manual Print Exit
Dispense Load Directn
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.5
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
Paste Removal During continuous printing operations paste residue build up may occur with the
same screen in use and with the squeegee option fitted. This build up can affect
the print quality of the print process, ie paste in apertures, paste ‘tramlining’ on
the screen and residue on the squeegees.
Before loading paste the operator should ensure that any residue is cleaned off
the screen and squeegees.
To clean the screen effectively, it is recommended that the operator removes the
screen from the machine during this operation (see Operator Manual - Product
Changeover).
WARNING
RECOMMENDED SOLVENTS. ANY SOLVENTS USED MUST
COMPLY WITH LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDELINES. DEK
RECOMMEND USING SOLVENTS THAT ARE ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY, IE CFC FREE AND WATER BASED. SOLVENTS USED
MUST HAVE FAST EVAPORATION RATES AND FLASHPOINT
SPECIFICATIONS GREATER THAN 39° C.
WARNING
SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENTS. WHEN USING OR HANDLINGANY
S O L D E R PA S T E O R S O LV E N T F O R M U L AT I O N T H E
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE STRICTLYADHERED TO.
WARNING
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. APPROVED PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENT HANDLERS
AT ALL TIMES TO ELIMINATE FUME INHALATION, EYE
CONTACT, SKIN CONTACTAND INGESTION.
Remove paste from the screen and squeegees with a spatula and place in a
suitable container. Smear deposits are removed using a suitable cleaning cloth
dampened with a suitable solvent.
NOTE
Waste paste and contaminated cleaning cloths are to be disposed of in
accordance with local authority regulations.
9.6 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
Auto Dispense An alternative to manual loading of solder paste to the screen is given with the
provision of an automatic paste dispenser. This is mounted to the rear of the
print carriage.
The paste dispenser uses either a 1 Kg or 500g cartridge. The 500g cartridge
requires the fitting of a sleeve which is an option. This enables any loading of
paste to be carried out without the need for the operator to handle the paste.
A slug inside the cartridge, travels down the cartridge as the paste is used. A
proximity sensor fitted to the side of the dispenser detects the metal content of
the paste. When the cartridge is empty the sensor initiates a ‘Print Medium
Low. Please Replenish’ warning window to the operator.
Programming into a The paste dispense parameters can be setup when editing a product file for a new
Product File product, although it may be more convenient to set these after the product has
been run for a while and paste requirements have been determined.
The parameters to be edited that affect the operation of the paste dispenser are:
Paste Dispense Rate:
This determines the frequency of the cycling of the paste dispenser. The setting
is gauged by running the product and noting the number of prints before paste
replenishment is required. This can be set to any number between 0 to 100 in
increments of 1.
Paste Dispense Speed:
This determines the speed at which the paste dispenser travels across the screen
and hence the amount of paste which is dispensed. This parameter needs to be
set in conjunction with the Paste Dispense Rate. This can be set to any number
between 10mm/s and 100mm/s in increments of 1mm/s.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.7
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
To Enter Paste
Dispense Parameters
From the Status Page 1. Press Setup (F6).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Press Edit Data (F3).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The following window is displayed:
3. Using the Next and Previous keys (F4 - F5) select the Paste Dispense Rate.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
4. Using the Incr. and Decr. keys (F6 -F7) set the required rate.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
9.8 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
5. Using the Next key (F4) select the Paste Dispense Speed.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
6. Using the Incr. and Decr. keys (F6 - F7) set the required speed.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
7. Press Exit (F8).
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
8. Press Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
Dispensing Paste at The operator can cycle the paste dispenser at random intervals and before a print
Random Intervals run in addition to any preprogrammed cycles.
To load paste prior to a print run:
1. Press Paste Load (F3).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Press Auto Dispense (F1).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
3. If the paste dispenser has sufficient paste the dispenser carries out an
automatic dispense, go to Step 13. If the paste dispenser is low on paste a
warning window is displayed. The warning window varies, depending on
the setting of the consumable action option in set preferences. If the set
preference is set to warn, continue with Step 4. If the set preference is set to
pause or suspend go to Step 8.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.9
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
4. If the set preference is set to warn, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows amber/green.
5. Select Confirm (F1).
Confirm
6. To replace the paste cartridge carry out the Fitting a New Paste Cartridge
procedure, later in this section.
7. Repeat Steps 1, 2 and 13.
8. If the set preference is set to pause, the following window and menu bar is
displayed:
Refill Cancel
Paste
If the set preference is set to suspend, the following window and menu bar is
displayed:
Refill Cancel
Paste
In both cases the tricoloured beacon shows red.
9.10 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
9. Select Refill Paste (F1).
Refill Cancel
Paste
NOTE
If either the under screen cleaner paper or solvent are low or the Vortex
cleaning cassette has expired and are reported first, the refill paste option is
not displayed. In this case select Cancel until Refill Paste is displayed in the
menu bar.
The message ‘Select Load Cart to load the cartridge or exit to abort.’ is
displayed.
10. Select Load Cart. (F1).
Load Exit
Cart.
The print carriage drives to the front of the machine and the dispenser rises to
the vertical position. A message is displayed on the screen ‘Open Cover
and Replace Paste Cartridge’.
11. To replace the paste cartridge carry out Steps 3-10 of Fitting a New Paste
Cartridge procedure, later in this section.
12. Repeat Steps 1, 2 and 13.
13. After the dispense routine has been completed, press Exit (F8).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
To Load Paste 1. Press Paste Load (F3).
During a Print Run
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste
2. Press Auto Dispense (F1).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.11
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
3. If the paste dispenser has sufficient paste the dispenser carries out an
automatic dispense, go to Step 22. If the paste dispenser is low on paste a
warning window is displayed. The warning window varies, depending on
the setting of the consumable action option in set preferences. If the set
preference is set to warn, continue with Step 4. If the set preference is set to
pause go to Step 10. If the set preference is set to suspend go to Step 16.
4. If the set preference is set to warn, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows amber/green.
5. Select Confirm (F1).
Confirm
6. Select End Run (F1).
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste
7. To replace the paste cartridge carry out Fitting a New Paste Cartridge
procedure, later in this section.
8. Select Run (F1).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
9. Repeat Steps 1, 2 and 22.
10. If the set preference is set to pause, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows red.
9.12 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
11. Select Refill Paste (F1).
Refill Defer
Paste
The message ‘Select Load Cart to load the cartridge or exit to abort.’ is
displayed.
NOTE
Select Defer to continue printing without replacing the paste cartridge.
12. Select Load Cart. (F1).
Load Exit
Cart.
The message ‘Open the cover and load the new paste cartridge then close
Cover, press System Button and press Continue’ is displayed.
13. Carry out Steps 3-9 of Fitting a New Paste Cartridge procedure, later in this
section.
14. Select Continue (F1).
Continue Open
Cover
15. Go to Step 21.
16. If the set preference is set to suspend, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows red.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.13
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
17. Select Refill Paste (F1).
Refill End
Paste Run
The message ‘Select Load Cart to load the cartridge or exit to abort.’ is
displayed.
NOTE
Select End Run to terminate the print run without replacing the paste
cartridge.
18. Select Load Cart. (F1).
Load Exit
Cart.
The message ‘Open the cover and load the new paste cartridge then close
Cover, press System Button and press Continue’ is displayed.
19. Carry out Steps 3-9 of Fitting a New Paste Cartridge procedure, later in this
section.
20. Select Continue (F1).
Continue Open
Cover
21. Select Auto Dispense (F1).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
22. After the dispense routine has been completed, press Exit (F8).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
9.14 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
Fitting a New Paste It is necessary at intervals to fit a new paste cartridge into the paste dispenser. If
Cartridge there is no cartridge in the dispenser or the cartridge is empty, the warning
window ‘Print Medium Low. Please Replenish.’ is displayed.
If the consumable action option in set preferences is set to suspend, the paste
dispenser is checked to ensure availabilily of paste, before allowing a print run to
start. If paste isn’t available the warning window ‘Print Medium Low. Please
Replenish.’ is displayed.
WARNING
SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENTS. WHEN USING OR HANDLINGANY
S O L D E R PA S T E O R S O LV E N T F O R M U L AT I O N T H E
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE STRICTLYADHERED TO.
WARNING
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. APPROVED PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENT HANDLERS
AT ALL TIMES TO ELIMINATE FUME INHALATION, EYE
CONTACT, SKIN CONTACTAND INGESTION.
To replace the paste cartridge carry out the following:
1. Press Paste Load (F3).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Press Load Cart. (F4).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
The print carriage drives to the front of the machine and the dispenser rises to the
vertical position. A message is displayed on the screen ‘Open cover and
replace Paste Cartridge’.
3. Open the front printhead cover.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.15
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
4. Remove the empty cartridge by unscrewing the cap at the rear of the paste
dispense tube to allow it to be withdrawn.
5. Unscrew the nozzle from the old cartridge and insert it into the new
cartridge.
6. Fit the new cartridge into the dispenser.
9.16 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PASTE LOADING
7. Screw the end cap onto the dispenser finger tight. Ensure the pneumatic
fitting on the cap is facing towards the rear of the machine.
8. Close the front printhead cover.
9. Press the System button.
10. Press Exit (F8).
Auto Manual Load Print Exit
Dispense Load Cart. Directn
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.17
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
Provision is made on the printer for automatic underscreen cleaning. This is
carried out using a lint free paper roll which can be dry or wetted with an
appropriate solvent. A combination of wet and dry wipes can be programmed.
The cleaning options can be programmed into a particular product file so that
they take place at preprogrammed intervals or they can be selected, directly from
the MMI, to take place at the operators discretion.
Programming The screen clean parameters can be setup when editing a product file, while
Screen Clean setting up a new product. It may be more convenient to set these after the
Operation into a product has been setup and printed and screen cleaning requirements have been
Product File decided upon.
The parameters to be edited that affect the operation of the underscreen cleaner
are:
Clean Screen Rate:
This parameter sets the number of print cycles between the cycling of the
underscreen cleaner. This can be set at any number between 0 to 200 in
increments of 1.
9.18 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
Clean Screen Modes:
These parameters determine the modes of operation for the screen cleaner. Each
mode can have a cleaning sequence with up to six sweeps, each of which can be
set to VAC, DRY, WET or NONE.
Sweeps set with NONE option cause no action to be taken during the sequence.
For example, the settings:
DRY, NONE, NONE, DRY, NONE, WET and
DRY, DRY, WET, NONE, NONE, NONE
Both carry out two consecutive operations, directly followed by one WET
cleaning operation.
The default setting is NONE for all six steps.
Solvent Advice The following solvents MUST NOT be used in the underscreen cleaner.
However, this list is not complete and does not mean that any solvent not
mentioned is compatible, with DEK machines.
• Rosstech 106 FE
• Rosstech 162 ND
• Acetone
DEK are continuously evaluating alternative solvents. If you require a particular
solvent to be used, but are unsure of its suitability for DEK machines, please
contact the DEK Customer Support Group.
NOTE
Rosstech 147FD is used within DEK manufacturing division and has been found
to be compatible with DEK underscreen cleaner units.
1. Press Setup (F6).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Press Edit Data (F3).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.19
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
The following window is displayed:
3. Use the Next and Previous keys (F4 - F5) to highlight the Screen Clean Rate.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
4. Use the Incr. and Decr. keys (F6 -F7) to set the Screen Clean Rate. This can
be set at any number between 0 and 200 in increments of 1.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
5. Use the Previous key (F5) to highlight the Screen Clean Mode. This
parameter determines the mode of operation of the screen cleaner.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
6. Press the Incr. or Decr. keys (F6 - F7) to enter the Screen Clean Mode.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
9.20 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
The Screen Clean Mode window is opened:
Screen Clean Mode 1
Sweep Number
1 2 3 4 5 6
WET DRY DRY NONE NONE NONE
7. Use the Left and Right keys (F2 - F3) to highlight the next sweep number to
be changed.
Left Right Incr. Decr. Exit
8. Use the Incr. and Decr. keys (F6 - F7) to select the operation required for the
highlighted sweep. The four options are: VAC, DRY, WET and NONE.
Left Right Incr. Decr. Exit
9. If the six stage sequence is setup as required, go to the next step, otherwise
return to Step 7.
10. Press Exit (F8).
Left Right Incr. Decr. Exit
11. Press Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
Paper and Solvent Paper and solvent replenishment can take place with the cleaner unit in the
Replenishment printer. When paper or solvent needs replenishment a warning window is
automatically displayed on the monitor. The warning window varies, depending
on the setting of the consumable action option in set preferences. The message
in the warning window depends on whether the solvent or paper or both require
replenishment. The procedure varies, depending on whether the replenishment
is prior to a print run or during a print run.
Replenishment Prior to a Print Run:
If the set preference is set to warn, continue with Step 1. If the set preference is
set to pause or suspend go to Step 4.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.21
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
1. If the set preference is set to warn, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows amber/green.
2. Select Confirm (F1).
Confirm
3. Go to Step 17.
4. If the set preference is set to pause, the following window and menu bar is
displayed:
Cancel
If the set preference is set to suspend, the following window and menu bar is
displayed:
Cancel
In both cases the tricoloured beacon shows red.
5. Select Cancel (F8).
Cancel
9.22 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
6. Go to Step 17.
Replenishment During a Print Run:
If the set preference is set to warn, continue with Step 7. If the set preference is
set to pause go to Step 11. If the set preference is set to suspend go to Step 15.
7. If the set preference is set to warn, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows amber/green.
8. Select Confirm (F1).
Confirm
9. Select End Run (F1).
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste
10. Go to Step 17.
11. If the set preference is set to pause, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows red.
12. Select Defer (F8).
Defer
The print run continues.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.23
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
13. Select End Run (F1).
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste
14. Go to Step 17.
15. If the set preference is set to suspend, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows red.
16. Select End Run (F8).
End
Run
17. Press Open Cover (F2).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
18. If the paper roll is to be replenished continue with Step 19. If the solvent tank
only is to be replenished go to Step 20.
19. Press Change Screen (F2).
Change Board Prime Prime Exit
Screen Clamps Paper Solvent
9.24 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
20. Lift the front printhead cover.
21. If the paper roll is to be replenished continue with Step 22. If the solvent tank
only is to be replenished go to Solvent Replenishment section.
[Link] the screen.
23 Go to Paper Replenishment section.
Solvent
Replenishment
WARNING
RECOMMENDED SOLVENTS. ANY SOLVENTS USED MUST
COMPLY WITH LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDELINES. DEK
RECOMMEND USING SOLVENTS THAT ARE ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY, IE CFC FREE AND WATER BASED. SOLVENTS USED
MUST HAVE FAST EVAPORATION RATES AND FLASHPOINT
SPECIFICATIONS GREATER THAN 39° C.
WARNING
SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENTS. WHEN USING OR HANDLINGANY
S O L D E R PA S T E O R S O LV E N T F O R M U L AT I O N T H E
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE STRICTLYADHERED TO.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.25
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
WARNING
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. APPROVED PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENT HANDLERS
AT ALL TIMES TO ELIMINATE FUME INHALATION, EYE
CONTACT, SKIN CONTACTAND INGESTION.
WARNING
SOLVENT SOLUTION. DO NOT MIX SOLVENT SOLUTIONS. FLUSH
THE SOLVENT TANK THOROUGHLY WHEN CHANGING TO A
DIFFERENT SOLVENT SOLUTION.
WARNING
SOLVENT SPRAY. THE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER SPRAYS A FINE
JET OF SOLVENT SOLUTION ON TO THE CLEANER. APPROVED
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING SHOULD BE WORN.
1. Remove the solvent tank cap (1) from the solvent tank (2).
NOTE
Numbers in brackets refer to figure below.
1 2
2. Using a suitable container refill the tank and replace the cap.
3. Close the front printhead cover.
9.26 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
4. Press the System button.
5. Press Prime Solvent (F6) key.
Change Board Prime Prime Exit
Screen Clamps Paper Solvent
The message ‘Press the two button control buttons to prime solvent.’ is
displayed.
6. Prime the solvent using the two button control.
7. Press Exit (F8).
Change Board Prime Prime Exit
Screen Clamps Paper Solvent
Paper
Replenishment
WARNING
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. APPROVED PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENT HANDLERS
AT ALL TIMES TO ELIMINATE FUME INHALATION, EYE
CONTACT, SKIN CONTACTAND INGESTION.
WARNING
FLAMMABLE. THE USED PAPER ROLL CONTAINS RESIDUES OF
UNDERSCREEN CLEANER FLUID AND SOLDER PASTE. OBSERVE
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED DISPOSALINSTRUCTIONS.
NOTE
When using 300 or 400mm wide paper rolls, ensure the correct paper roll
spacers are used.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.27
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
1. Lift the empty paper roll from the front of the cleaner.
2. Remove the paper spindles from both ends of the empty paper roll.
3. Remove the take up roll from the rear of the unit by easing the roll to the left
against spring pressure, until the right hand end is clear of the motor drive
spindle in the right hand end plate. Lift the take up roll clear of the unit.
9.28 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
4. Rotate the left hand flange a quarter turn to the right to unlock the paper roll
rod from the paper roll shaft.
5. Rotate the paper roll end flange a quarter turn to the left and right, whilst
gently pulling the rod clear of the paper roll.
6. Slide the contaminated cleaner paper from the paper roll shaft. Dispose of
the contaminated cleaner paper in accordance with manufacturers’
recommended disposal instructions.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.29
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
7. Fit the left hand shaft end into the cleaner left hand end plate.
8. Locate the right hand end of the paper roll shaft into the motor drive spindle
ensuring the shaft is correctly seated.
9. Rotate the paper roll shaft until the groove is at 45° to the horizontal, facing
towards the top rear printhead cover of the machine.
9.30 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
10. Refit the paper spindles to both ends of the new paper roll. Ensure both
faces of the new paper roll are flush.
11. Install the new clean paper roll at the front of the unit, ensure the paper is
routed from underneath the roll towards the rear of the unit.
12. Feed the cleaner paper across the body assembly, ensuring the cleaner paper
is aligned parallel to the unit end plate.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.31
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
13. Insert the paper roll rod into the right hand flange of the shaft. Lay the rod
along the shaft’s groove trapping the cleaner paper between the shaft and
rod.
14. Rotate the end flange of the rod towards the rear of the machine to lock the
rod onto the shaft.
15. Rotate the take up roll one complete revolution against the motor clutch to
tension the cleaner paper across the cleaner squeegee assembly.
9.32 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
16. Ensure the cleaner paper has been routed correctly, from underneath the
paper roll (1) rearwards across the squeegee assembly and threaded between
paper rod and shaft (2).
NOTE
Figures in brackets refer to the diagram below.
1 2
17. Press Prime Paper (F5) key.
Board Prime Prime Exit
Clamps Paper Solvent
The message ‘Press the two control buttons to feed paper’ is displayed.
18. Using the two button control, prime the paper ensuring it feeds correctly.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.33
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
BLUE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
19. Insert the screen into the printer, ensure correct orientation and print
justification.
20. Close the front printhead cover.
21. Press the System button.
26. Press Change Screen (F2).
Change Board Prime Prime Exit
Screen Clamps Paper Solvent
24. Press Exit (F8).
Change Board Prime Prime Exit
Screen Clamps Paper Solvent
9.34 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
Provision is made on the printer for automatic underscreen cleaning. This is
carried out using a cleaning cassette which contains a wet and a dry cell. The wet
cell is impregnated with an appropriate solvent. A cleaning cycle consists of a
single return stroke incorporating a wet and dry wipe with or without vacuum.
The cleaning options can be programmed into a particular product file so that
they take place at preprogrammed intervals or they can be selected, directly from
the MMI, to take place at the operators discretion.
Programming The screen clean parameters can be setup when editing a product file, while
Screen Clean setting up a new product. It may be more convenient to set these after the
Operation into a product has been setup and printed and screen cleaning requirements have been
Product File decided upon.
The parameters to be edited that affect the operation of the underscreen cleaner
are listed below with a definition of each as an aid to setup:
Parameter Definition
Front Start Offset The distance, in from the front edge of the board, at which the cleaner is to
finish. While a Vortex USC is in use the minimum value is extended from 0
to -60mm.
Minimum -60mm
Maximum 60mm
Default 30mm
Increment 1mm
Rear Start Offset The distance, in from the rear edge of the board, at which the cleaner is to
start. While a Vortex USC is in use the minimum value is extended from 0 to
-60mm.
Minimum -60mm
Maximum 60mm
Default 30mm
Increment 1mm
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.35
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
Parameter Definition
Vortex Cassette Life This parameter sets the number of cleaning strokes that are applied before a
cleaning cassette is replaced.
Minimum 0
Maximum 200
Default 20
Increment 1
Vortex Clean Rate This parameter sets the frequency (in print cycles) at which screen cleaning
occurs.
Minimum 0
Maximum 200
Default 0
Increment 1
Vortex Solvent Rate This parameter sets the frequency (in cleaning cycles) at which solvent is
dispensed.
Minimum 1
Maximum 10
Default 1
Increment 1
Vortex Vacuum Start The distance, in from the front edge of the board, where vacuum is applied.
Minimum Vacuum Stop
Maximum Board Width
Default 0mm
Increment 1mm
Vortex Vacuum Stop The distance, in from the front edge of the board, where vacuum application
is stopped.
Minimum -100mm
Maximum Vacuum Stop
Default 0mm
Increment 1mm
Vortex Vacuum Rate This parameter sets the frequency (in cleaning cycles) at which vacuum is
applied.
Minimum 1
Maximum 10
Default 1
Increment 1
Vortex Vacuum Period This parameter sets the period for which vacuum is applied.
Minimum 1 sec
Maximum 10 secs
Default 5 secs
Increment 1 sec
Dry Clean Speed This parameter sets the speed of the screen clean return stroke.
Minimum 10mm/sec
Maximum 120mm/sec
Default 30mm/sec
Increment 1mm/sec
9.36 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
Solvent Advice The following solvents MUST NOT be used in the underscreen cleaner.
However, this list is not complete and does not mean that any solvent not
mentioned is compatible, with DEK machines.
• Rosstech 106 FE
• Rosstech 162 ND
• Acetone
DEK are continuously evaluating alternative solvents. If you wish to use a
particular type of solvent, but are unsure of its suitability for DEK machines,
please contact the DEK Customer Support Group.
1. Press Setup (F6).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Press Edit Data (F3).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
The following window is displayed:
Edit Current Process Parameters
UNDER CLEARANCE 19.0 mm
SEPARATION SPEED 2.0 mm/s
SEPARATION DISTANCE 3.0 mm
BOARD COUNT 0 boards
PRINT DEPOSITS 1
PASTE WHILE CLEAN Disabled
PASTE RIDGE REMOVAL Enabled
VORTEX CLEAN RATE 0 Print Cycle
VORTEX SOLVENT RATE 1 Clean Cycle
VORTEX VACUUM START Board Width mm
VORTEX VACUUM STOP 0 mm
VORTEX VACUUM RATE 1 Clean Cycle
VORTEX VACUUM PERIOD 5 Second
DRY CLEAN SPEED 40 mm/s
..more
3. Use the Next and Previous keys (F4 - F5) to highlight the required
parameter.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.37
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
4. Use the Incr. and Decr. keys (F6 -F7) to set the required value of the selected
parameter.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all remaining parameters.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
6. Press Save (F2) on completion of parameter setup.
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
7. Press Exit (F8).
Save Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
8. Press Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
Cleaning Cassette The cleaning cassette and solvent replenishment can take place with the cleaner
and Solvent unit in the printer. When the cleaning cassette or solvent needs replenishment a
Replenishment warning window is automatically displayed on the monitor. The warning
window varies, depending on the setting of the consumable action option in set
preferences. The message in the warning window depends on whether the
cleaning cassette or solvent or both require replenishment. The procedure
varies, depending on whether the replenishment is prior to a print run or during a
print run.
Replenishment Prior to a Print Run:
If the set preference is set to warn, continue with Step 1. If the set preference is
set to pause or suspend go to Step 4.
1. If the set preference is set to warn, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows amber/green.
9.38 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
2. Select Confirm (F1).
Confirm
3. Go to Step 17.
4. If the set preference is set to pause, the following window and menu bar is
displayed:
Cancel
If the set preference is set to suspend, the following window and menu bar is
displayed:
Cancel
In both cases the tricoloured beacon shows red.
5. Select Cancel (F8).
Cancel
6. Go to Step 17.
Replenishment During a Print Run:
If the set preference is set to warn, continue with Step 7. If the set preference is
set to pause go to Step 11. If the set preference is set to suspend go to Step 15.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.39
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
7. If the set preference is set to warn, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows amber/green.
8. Select Confirm (F1).
Confirm
9. Select End Run (F1).
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste
10. Go to Step 17.
11. If the set preference is set to pause, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows red.
12. Select Defer (F8).
Defer
The print run continues.
13. Select End Run (F1).
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste
14. Go to Step 17.
9.40 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
15. If the set preference is set to suspend, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows red.
16. Select End Run (F8).
End
Run
17. Press Open Cover (F2).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
18. If the Vortex cleaning cassette is to be replenished continue with Step 19. If
the solvent tank only is to be replenished go to Step 20.
19. Press Change Screen (F2).
Change Board Prime Prime Exit
Screen Clamps Paper Solvent
20. Lift the front printhead cover.
21. If the Vortex cleaning is to be replenished continue with Step 22. If the
solvent tank only is to be replenished go to Solvent Replenishment section.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.41
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
[Link] the screen.
23. Go to the Cleaning Cassette Replenishment section.
Solvent
Replenishment
WARNING
RECOMMENDED SOLVENTS. ANY SOLVENTS USED MUST
COMPLY WITH LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDELINES. DEK
RECOMMEND USING SOLVENTS THAT ARE ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY, IE CFC FREE AND WATER BASED. SOLVENTS USED
MUST HAVE FAST EVAPORATION RATES AND FLASHPOINT
SPECIFICATIONS GREATER THAN 39° C.
WARNING
SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENTS. WHEN USING OR HANDLINGANY
S O L D E R PA S T E O R S O LV E N T F O R M U L AT I O N T H E
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE STRICTLYADHERED TO.
WARNING
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. APPROVED PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENT HANDLERS
AT ALL TIMES TO ELIMINATE FUME INHALATION, EYE
CONTACT, SKIN CONTACTAND INGESTION.
WARNING
SOLVENT SOLUTION. DO NOT MIX SOLVENT SOLUTIONS. FLUSH
THE SOLVENT TANK THOROUGHLY WHEN CHANGING TO A
DIFFERENT SOLVENT SOLUTION.
WARNING
SOLVENT SPRAY. THE UNDERSCREEN CLEANER SPRAYS A FINE
JET OF SOLVENT SOLUTION ON TO THE CLEANER. APPROVED
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING SHOULD BE WORN.
9.42 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
1. Remove the solvent tank cap (1) from the solvent tank (2)..
1
2
2. Using a suitable container refill the tank and replace the cap.
3. Close the front printhead cover.
4. Press the System button.
5. Press Prime Solvent (F6) key.
Change Board Prime Exit
Screen Clamps Solvent
The message ‘Press the two button control buttons to prime solvent.’ is
displayed.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.43
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
6. Prime the solvent using the two button control.
7. Press Exit (F8).
Change Board Prime Exit
Screen Clamps Solvent
Cleaning Cassette
Replenishment
WARNING
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. APPROVED PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENT HANDLERS
AT ALL TIMES TO ELIMINATE FUME INHALATION, EYE
CONTACT, SKIN CONTACTAND INGESTION.
WARNING
FLAMMABLE. THE USED VORTEX CLEANING CASSETTE AND
VO RT E X F I LT E R C A S S E T T E C O N TA I N R E S I D U E S O F
UNDERSCREEN CLEANER FLUID AND SOLDER PASTE. OBSERVE
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED DISPOSALINSTRUCTIONS.
NOTE
The cleaning cassettes come in different sizes, ensure the correct size is
replaced.
9.44 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
1. Carefully lift the cleaning cassette (1) clear of the two pip pins (2) and slide
out from beneath the solvent bar (3).
NOTE
Numbers in brackets refer to figure below.
3
2
2. Dispose of the used cleaning cassette in accordance with local authority
guidelines.
3. If the filter cassette is to be replaced continue with Step 4. If the filter
cassette is not being replaced go to Step 7.
NOTE
The filter cassettes are available in varying sizes, ensure the correct size is
replaced.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.45
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
4. Remove the vacuum grid (1) from the mounting tray (3). Remove the filter
cassette (2) from the mounting tray (3).
NOTE
Numbers in brackets refer to figure below.
1
2
5. Dispose of the used filter cassette in accordance with local authority
guidelines.
6. Fit the new filter cassette (2) into the mounting tray (3). Fit the vacuum grid
(1) into the mounting tray (3).
1
2
9.46 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
7. Fit the edge of the new cleaning cassette (1) beneath the solvent bar (3) and
snap into place on the two pip pins (2).
NOTE
Numbers in brackets refer to figure below.
3
2
8. Press Prime Solvent (F6) key.
Screen Board Prime Exit
Clamps Clamps Solvent
The message ‘Press the two button control buttons to prime solvent.’ is
displayed.
9. Prime the solvent using the two button control.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.47
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
VORTEX UNDERSCREEN CLEANER
10. Insert the screen into the printer, ensure correct orientation and print
justification.
11. Close the front printhead cover.
12. Press the System button.
13. Press Change Screen (F2).
Change Board Prime Prime Exit
Screen Clamps Paper Solvent
14. Press Exit (F8).
Change Board Prime Prime Exit
Screen Clamps Paper Solvent
9.48 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
SQUEEGEES
SQUEEGEES
Fitting the From the Status page:
Squeegees
1. Press Setup (F6).
Run Open Paste Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Load Screen
2. Press Setup Squeegee (F4).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
3. Press Change Squeegee (F1).
Change Calibrat Exit
Squeegee Heights
The message ‘Open cover and change squeegees’ is displayed.
4. Open the front printhead cover.
The front and rear squeegees must be fitted in the correct positions. Each
squeegee has a key-way machined into it to ensure that it cannot be incorrectly
fitted.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.49
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
SQUEEGEES
5. Fit the rear squeegee onto the rear squeegee mount tightening the
thumbscrews until they are finger tight.
6. Fit the front squeegee onto the front squeegee mount again ensuring that the
thumbscrews are only finger tight.
7. Close the front printhead cover.
8. Press the System button.
9. Press Continue (F1).
Continue
10. If fitted, remove stencil.
9.50 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
SQUEEGEES
Squeegee Pressure To complete this calibration, machines with non-feedback pressure system carry
Height out steps 1-13. For machines with pressure feedback option fitted carry out steps
14 - 17.
Non Feedback 1. Press Calibrat Heights (F2).
Change Calibrat Exit
Squeegee Heights
The message ‘Ensure correct squeegees are fitted!’ is displayed.
2. Press Continue (F1).
Continue Restore Exit
Defaults
The message ‘Set Squeegee Pressure Height’ is displayed.
Either:
3. Press Adjust (F2).
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
The following window is displayed:
Squeegee Heights Parameters
Front Zero Ref 4000
Rear Zero Ref 4040
4. Using Next, Previous, Incr. and Decr. (F4, F5, F6 and F7) enter the
squeegee heights parameters as necessary.
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
5. Press Exit (F8).
Next Previous Incr. Decr. Exit
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.51
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
SQUEEGEES
6. Press Save (F3).
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
Or:
7. Using Step Up and Step Down (F6 and F7) as necessary to raise or lower
the front squeegee until it just touches the front rail.
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
8. Press Rear Squeegee (F5).
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
9. Using Step Up and Step Down (F6 and F7) as necessary to raise or lower
the rear squeegee until it just touches the front rail.
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
10. Press Save (F3).
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
11. Press Exit (F8).
Adjust Save Front Rear Step Step Exit
Squeegee Squeegee Up Down
12. Press Exit (F8).
Change Calibrat Exit
Squeegee Heights
13. Press Exit (F8)
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
9.52 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
SQUEEGEES
Feedback Option 14. Press Calibrat Heights (F2).
Change Calibrat Exit
Squeegee Heights
The message ‘Ensure correct squeegees are fitted!’ is displayed.
15. Press Continue (F1).
Continue Restore Exit
Defaults
The message ‘Calibrating Pressure Heights - DO NOT Open Covers!’ is
displayed.
16. Press Exit (F8).
Continue Restore Exit
Defaults
17. Press Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data Squeegee Screen Tooling Language
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.53
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
PROFLOW
ProFlow Cassette It is necessary at intervals to fit a new ProFlow cassette into the ProFlow transfer
Change head. If the cassette is empty at the end of a print stroke, the warning window
‘Print Medium Low. Please Replenish.’ is displayed.
WARNING
SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENTS. WHEN USING OR HANDLINGANY
S O L D E R PA S T E O R S O LV E N T F O R M U L AT I O N T H E
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE STRICTLYADHERED TO.
WARNING
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. APPROVED PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENT HANDLERS
AT ALL TIMES TO ELIMINATE FUME INHALATION, EYE
CONTACT, SKIN CONTACTAND INGESTION.
NOTE
When using a ProFlow transfer head for the first time or if the transfer head
conditioning chamber has been cleaned, ie free from solder paste. The
conditioning chamber must be primed first with the print medium. Two ProFlow
cassettes are required, the first ProFlow cassette is used to prime the
conditioning chamber. The second ProFlow cassette is fitted ready for machine
operation.
The ProFlow cassette can be fitted or changed prior to and during a print run.
Prior to a Print Run The ProFlow cassette can be fitted or changed prior to selecting Run.
1. If ProFlow is in the home position continue from Step 2. If ProFlow is in the
contact position go to Step 19.
2. Select Setup (F6).
Run Open Knead Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Paste Screen
3. Select Setup ProFlow (F4).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data ProFlow Screen Tooling Language
9.54 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
4. Select Load Cassette (F4).
Change Load Exit
ProFlow Cassette
The message ‘Has the ProFlow unit’s base cover been removed?’ is
displayed.
5. If the ProFlow unit’s base cover is still fitted continue with Step 6. If the
ProFlow unit’s base cover has been removed go to Step 12.
6. Select Remove Cover (F8).
Yes Remove
Cover
The message ‘Open the printer cover and remove the ProFlow unit’s
base cover’ is displayed.
7. Open the front printhead cover.
8. Remove the ProFlow unit’s base cover.
9. Close the front printhead cover.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.55
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
10. Press the System button.
11. Select Exit (F8).
Exit
12. Select Yes (F1).
Yes Remove
Cover
The message ‘The ProFlow unit will be placed in the REAR envelope’ is
displayed.
13. If the ProFlow unit is required to be placed in another envelope continue with
Step 14. If the ProFlow unit is required to be placed in the machine preferred
envelope go to Step 18.
14. Select Select Another (F8).
Proceed Select
Another
The following window is displayed:
Preferred Envelope
REAR
FRONT
15. Use the Next or Previous keys (F4 or F5) to highlight Front.
Use Next Previous Exit
9.56 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
16. Select Use (F1).
Use Next Previous Exit
17. Select Exit (F8).
Use Next Previous Exit
18. Select Proceed (F1).
Proceed Select
Another
The ProFlow unit is placed in contact with the screen.
19. Open the front printhead cover.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.57
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
20. To gain access to the transfer head (1), release the latch on the front of the
pressure mechanism (2) and raise the mechanism forward and upwards to
engage the spring locking device.
NOTE
Numbers in brackets refer to figure below.
21. To release the carrier from the transfer head, unscrew the thumbscrews (1) at
each end of the carrier to loosen the clamp brackets. Hinge the clamp
brackets (2) outwards. Hinge the carrier and paste cassette (3) towards the
front of the machine exposing the top of the paste cassette.
NOTE
Numbers in brackets refer to figure below.
3
1
3
2
9.58 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
22. Carefully remove the empty paste cassette (1) from the carrier (2) by lifting
the paste cassette clear of the retaining pins (3) sited at each end of the carrier
unit.
NOTE
Numbers in brackets refer to figure below.
23. Dispose of the empty cassette in accordance with local authority guidelines.
24. Fit a new cassette (1) into the carrier recess (2) and secure into place with the
retaining pins (3).
NOTE
Numbers in brackets refer to figure below.
2 1
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.59
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
25. Remove the sealing foil from the top of the new paste cassette.
26. Hinge the clamp brackets (1) inwards to position the cassette onto the
transfer head, secure in place by tightening the thumbwheels (2).
27. Lower the pressure mechanism (3) in place until the latch engages.
NOTE
Numbers in brackets refer to figure below.
2
1
28. Close the front printhead cover.
29. Press the System button.
9.60 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
30. Select Setup ProFlow (F4).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data ProFlow Screen Tooling Language
31. Select Prime ProFlow (F6).
Change Load Prime Exit
ProFlow Cassette ProFlow
If it is possible to carry out the prime ProFlow function the message
‘Performing knead off-image.’ is displayed. If it is not possible the
function is deferred until it is, ie at the start of a print stroke with a board
loaded.
32. Select Exit (F8).
Change Load Prime Exit
ProFlow Cassette ProFlow
33. Select Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Exit
Data Data ProFlow Screen Tooling
During a Print Run When the ProFlow cassette needs replenishment a warning window is
automatically displayed on the monitor. The warning window varies, depending
on the setting of the consumable action option in set preference.
If the set preference is set to warn, continue with Step 1. If the set preference is
set to pause go to Step 6. If the set preference is set to suspend go to Step 11.
1. If the set preference is set to warn, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows amber/green.
2. Select Confirm (F1).
Confirm
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.61
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
3. Select End Run (F1).
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste
4. Carry out Steps 19-33 of Prior to a Print Run procedure, earlier in this
section.
5. Select Run (F1). The print run resumes.
Run Head Knead Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Paste Screen
6. If the set preference is set to pause, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows red.
7. Select Refill Paste (F1).
Refill Defer
Paste
The message ‘Open the cover and change the ProFlow cassette.’ is
displayed.
8. Select Open Cover (F2).
Continue Open
Cover
9. Carry out Steps 19-33 of Prior to a Print Run procedure, earlier in this
section.
10. Select Continue (F1). The print run resumes.
Continue Open
Cover
9.62 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
11. If the set preference is set to suspend, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows red.
12. Select Refill Paste (F1).
Refill End
Paste Run
The message ‘Open the cover and change the ProFlow cassette.’ is
displayed.
13. Select Open Cover (F2).
Continue Open
Cover
14. Carry out Steps 19-33 of Prior to a Print Run procedure, earlier in this
section.
15. Select Continue (F1). The print run resumes.
Continue Open
Cover
Paste Due to wear over prolonged periods, it is necessary to replace the wiper foils and
Retention System end retainers (skis). An obvious indication of blade deterioration is print
Replacement medium left deposited on the screen after a print cycle.
Replace the wiper foils and end retainers (skis) as follows:
WARNING
SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENTS. WHEN USING OR HANDLINGANY
S O L D E R PA S T E O R S O LV E N T F O R M U L AT I O N T H E
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE STRICTLYADHERED TO.
WARNING
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. APPROVED PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENT HANDLERS
AT ALL TIMES TO ELIMINATE FUME INHALATION, EYE
CONTACT, SKIN CONTACTAND INGESTION.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.63
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
1. Press Setup (F6).
Run Open Knead Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Paste Screen
2. Press Setup ProFlow (F4).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data ProFlow Screen Tooling Language
3. Press Change ProFlow (F1).
Change Load Prime Exit
ProFlow Cassette ProFlow
The message ‘Replace ProFlow Cover Plate then Close Cover and Press
Continue’ is displayed.
4. Open the front printhead cover.
5. Fit the paste cover to the underside of the ProFlow transfer head unit.
6. Release the latch on the front of the pressure mechanism and raise the
mechanism forwards and upwards to engage the spring locking device.
7. Turn the rotary action ‘J’ latch anti-clockwise to release the transfer head
unit from the pressure mechanism. Lift the rotary action ‘J’ latch clear of the
transfer head chassis dowel to enable the transfer head unit to be lowered
from the two interface mounting rods.
9.64 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
Pressure Mechanism (in the Raised Position) Rotary Action ‘J’ Latch
Interface Mounting Rods (In 2 positions) ProFlow Transfer Head Unit
View on Front of Print Carriage
8. Invert the ProFlow transfer head and place onto the maintenance stand
(provided with the equipment).
9. Remove the paste cover from the ProFlow transfer head unit.
End Retainer (Ski)
Secondary Grid (Stainless Steel)
Wiper
Wiper Retaining Strip
Wiper
Wiper Retaining Strip
Retainer Bracket End Retainer (Ski)
(in 2 Positions)
Transfer Head Inverted
10. Carefully remove the wipers by loosening the six screw securing the wiper
retaining strips.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.65
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
11. Remove both end retainers (skis).
12. Prior to fitting replacement items ensure the area around the wipers and skis
is free from print medium deposits.
13. Fit replacement wipers into position ensuring both wipers are fully home
against the wiper securing screws.
NOTE
If fitting stepped etched wipers, ensure that the stepped edge of each wiper is
facing outwards (wiper example in figure below refers).
14. Fully tighten the wiper retaining strip screws.
15. Loosen both end retainer brackets (if fitted).
NOTE
Retainer brackets are not fitted to the rechargeable transfer head.
16. Slide each ski between the wipers until they are flush with the ends of the
wipers, (ensure the air escape hole on each ski faces outwards of the unit, see
figure below.)
17. Position both end retainer brackets and tighten the securing screws (if
applicable).
18. Fit the paste cover.
Wiper Securing Screw End Retainer (Ski) Wiper Wiper
Retaining Strip
Ski Air Escape Hole
Retainer Bracket
(if fitted)
ProFlow Transfer Head (Inverted)
Inverted Transfer Head (End View)
19. Slide the ProFlow transfer head unit onto the pressure mechanism mounting
rods and secure in place by hooking the ‘J’ rotary action latch onto the
transfer head chassis dowel pin and turn the latch clockwise.
20. Lower the pressure mechanism using the flush pull latch ensuring the
mechanism latch is engaged and is secured into place.
9.66 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
21. Close the front printhead cover.
22. Press the System button.
23. Press Continue (F1).
Continue
24. Press Exit (F8).
Change Load Prime Exit
ProFlow Cassette ProFlow
25. Press Exit (F8).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data ProFlow Screen Tooling Language
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.67
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
Rechargeable & It is necessary at intervals to replenish the rechargeable/ITC transfer head. If
ITC Transfer there is no print medium in the transfer head at the end of a print stroke, the
Heads warning window ‘Print Medium Low. Please Replenish.’ is displayed.
WARNING
SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENTS. WHEN USING OR HANDLINGANY
S O L D E R PA S T E O R S O LV E N T F O R M U L AT I O N T H E
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE STRICTLYADHERED TO.
WARNING
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. APPROVED PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDER PASTE AND SOLVENT HANDLERS
AT ALL TIMES TO ELIMINATE FUME INHALATION, EYE
CONTACT, SKIN CONTACTAND INGESTION.
Initial Filling If an empty/new rechargeable/ITC transfer head is to be used prior to printing.
The transfer head unit is to be initially charged in accordance with the following:
1. Fit the clean/new transfer head to the maintenance stand, so that the unit is
upside down.
2. Remove wipers, end retainers (skis) and the secondary ProFlow grid to gain
access to the primary grid.
3. Ensure that the long nosed nozzle is fitted to the recharging gun (mastic or
pneumatic gun).
4. Starting at one end of the centre row of holes in the primary grid, insert the
gun nozzle through the grid into the area adjacent to the diaphragm.
Long Recharging Nozzle
9.68 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
5. Fill the cavity until the paste starts to flow back up through the primary grid,
extracting the nozzle slowly whilst continuing to fill. (This action fills the
hole left by the nozzle.)
6. Move to the next available centre hole, in the primary grid, that has not been
filled with paste. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
7. Continue the above procedures until all the space below the primary grid is
topped up with paste.
NOTE
Ensure that there is little or no air bubbles trapped within the paste fill.
8. Refit the secondary ProFlow Grid, wipers and end retainers (skis) to the unit.
9. Starting at one end of the centre row of holes in the secondary ProFlow grid,
insert the gun nozzle through the grid into the conditioning chamber area.
Long Recharging Nozzle
10. Fill the cavity until the paste starts to flow back up through the grid,
extracting the nozzle slowly whilst continuing to fill. (This action fills the
hole left by the nozzle.)
11. Move to the next available centre hole, in the secondary grid, that has not
been filled with paste. Repeat Steps 9 and 10.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.69
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
12. Fill the remaining space between the secondary grid and the working edges
of the wiper blades ensuring that the paste is level, (procedure below refers).
13. Fit paste cover to the unit.
14. Remove the transfer head from the maintenance stand and fit the unit to the
ProFlow on the machine. (Refer to ProFlow Chapter in the Technical
Reference Manual for detailed information on unit removal/fitting.)
The transfer head can be replenished prior to and during a print run.
Prior to a Print Run The transfer head can be replenished prior to selecting Run.
1. If the ProFlow unit is in the home position continue with Step 2. If the
ProFlow unit is in the contact position go to Step 20.
2. Select Setup (F6).
Run Head Knead Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Paste Screen
3. Select Setup ProFlow (F4).
Mode Load Edit Setup Change Change Change Exit
Data Data ProFlow Screen Tooling Language
4. Select Load Cassette (F4).
Change Load Exit
ProFlow Cassette
The message ‘Has the ProFlow unit’s base cover been removed?’ is
displayed.
5. If the ProFlow unit’s base cover is still fitted continue with Step 6. If the
ProFlow unit’s base cover has been removed go to Step 12.
9.70 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
6. Select Remove Cover (F8).
Yes Remove
Cover
The message ‘Open the printer cover and remove the ProFlow unit’s
base cover’ is displayed.
7. Open the front printhead cover.
8. Remove the ProFlow unit’s base cover.
9. Close the front printhead cover.
10. Press the System button.
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.71
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
11. Select Exit (F8).
Exit
12. Select Yes (F1).
Yes Remove
Cover
The message ‘The ProFlow unit will be placed in the REAR envelope’ is
displayed.
13. If the ProFlow unit is required to be placed in another envelope continue with
Step 14. If the ProFlow unit is required to be placed in the machine preferred
envelope go to Step 18.
NOTE
The ProFlow unit needs to be in the rear envelope to replenish the ProFlow
transfer head.
14. Select Select Another (F8).
Proceed Select
Another
The following window is displayed:
Preferred Envelope
REAR
FRONT
15. Use the Next or Previous keys (F4 or F5) to highlight Front.
Use Next Previous Exit
16. Select Use (F1).
Use Next Previous Exit
17. Select Exit (F8).
Use Next Previous Exit
9.72 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
18. Select Proceed (F1).
Proceed Select
Another
The ProFlow unit is placed in contact with the screen.
19. Open the front printhead cover.
Recharging 1. Ensure that the ProFlow pressure mechanism is in the raised position (to
expose transfer head diaphragm).
2. Remove the centre filling port bayonet cap.
NOTE
The ITC transfer head has one central filling port only.
3. Using either a general purpose mastic gun or the optional pneumatic paste
gun (with a standard paste cartridge loaded). Push the nozzle of the gun into
the centre filling port of the ProFlow transfer head (see figure below).
Diaphragm Retainer
Diaphragm
Filling Port
Bayonet Cap
Filling Port
Bayonet Cap
Filling Port
Bayonet Cap Recharging Nozzles
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.73
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
Short Recharging Nozzle
4. Fill the diaphragm until it starts to balloon, this can be spread sideways by
massaging the diaphragm with the fingers.
5. Alternatively, fill using all three filling ports for even distribution.
NOTE
Ensure that only one port is opened at a time.
6. Do not overfill. If this occurs any excess will seep out between the wipers
and the screen.
NOTE
Clean any excess seepage before commencing print operations.
7. Ensure that the threaded areas around the filling ports are thoroughly clean
before commencing print operation.
8. Refit the port bayonet caps.
9. Close the front printhead cover.
9.74 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
10. Press the System button.
During a Print Run When the transfer head needs replenishing a warning window is automatically
displayed on the monitor. The warning window varies, depending on the setting
of the consumable action in set preference.
If the set preference is set to warn, continue with Step 1. If the set preference is
set to pause go to Step 6. If the set preference is set to suspend go to Step 13.
1. If the set preference is set to warn, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows amber/green.
2. Select Confirm (F1).
Confirm
3. Select End Run (F1), when the ProFlow unit is at the rear of the image.
End Stop Paste Clean Adjust Knead
Run Cycle Load Screen Paste
4. Carry out Steps 19-29 of Prior to a Print Run procedure, earlier in this
section.
5. Select Run (F1). The print run resumes.
Run Open Knead Clean Adjust Setup Monitor Maint.
Cover Paste Screen
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.75
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
6. If the set preference is set to pause, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows red.
7. Select Refill Paste (F1).
Refill Defer
Paste
The message ‘Open the cover and change the ProFlow cassette.’ is
displayed.
8. Select Open Cover (F2).
Continue Open
Cover
9. Carry out Steps 19-29 of Prior to a Print Run procedure, earlier in this
section.
10. Select Continue (F1). The print run resumes.
Continue Open
Cover
11. If the set preference is set to suspend, the following window is displayed:
The tricoloured beacon shows red.
12. Select Refill Paste (F1).
Refill Defer
Paste
The message ‘Open the cover and change the ProFlow cassette.’ is
displayed.
9.76 User Manual Software Version 6
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
13. Select Open Cover (F2).
Continue Open
Cover
14. Carry out Steps 19-29 of Prior to a Print Run procedure, earlier in this
section.
15. Select Continue (F1). The print run resumes.
Continue Open
Cover
Software Version 6 User Manual 9.77
CONSUMABLE REPLENISHMENTS
PROFLOW
9.78 User Manual Software Version 6
You might also like
- DEK Printing Machines Installation ManualNo ratings yetDEK Printing Machines Installation Manual68 pages
- Installation Guide for IEEE & USB BoardsNo ratings yetInstallation Guide for IEEE & USB Boards120 pages
- D203043-15 UJF-30,6042MkII OperationManual eNo ratings yetD203043-15 UJF-30,6042MkII OperationManual e118 pages
- Operation Manual: Thank You Very Much For Purchasing FY Series PrinterNo ratings yetOperation Manual: Thank You Very Much For Purchasing FY Series Printer29 pages
- IBM 6400 Line Matrix Printer Service ManualNo ratings yetIBM 6400 Line Matrix Printer Service Manual333 pages
- 402 2443 2824 2844 3842 3844 Desktop Thermal Printers Service ManualNo ratings yet402 2443 2824 2844 3842 3844 Desktop Thermal Printers Service Manual90 pages
- Operation Manual: Thank You Very Much For Purchasing FY Series PrinterNo ratings yetOperation Manual: Thank You Very Much For Purchasing FY Series Printer30 pages
- User Manual: Downloaded From Manuals Search EngineNo ratings yetUser Manual: Downloaded From Manuals Search Engine177 pages
- Operator's Manual: Corporate HeadquartersNo ratings yetOperator's Manual: Corporate Headquarters146 pages
- DATAMAX I Class Parts List, Service Manual100% (1)DATAMAX I Class Parts List, Service Manual177 pages
- Yamaha Application Software CD-ROM GuideNo ratings yetYamaha Application Software CD-ROM Guide1 page
- Thermodynamics Quiz Questions and AnswersNo ratings yetThermodynamics Quiz Questions and Answers18 pages
- Marker Pen Setup and Marking Settings GuideNo ratings yetMarker Pen Setup and Marking Settings Guide10 pages
- Built To Last Built To Last: About The Authors About The AuthorsNo ratings yetBuilt To Last Built To Last: About The Authors About The Authors8 pages
- IoT Rain Gauge Prototype with LoRa TechNo ratings yetIoT Rain Gauge Prototype with LoRa Tech15 pages
- Erection Testing & Commissioning ReportNo ratings yetErection Testing & Commissioning Report19 pages
- Understanding Preheat and Interpass Temperature100% (1)Understanding Preheat and Interpass Temperature4 pages
- Ultrasonic Sensor XX930A3A2M12 Data SheetNo ratings yetUltrasonic Sensor XX930A3A2M12 Data Sheet2 pages
- Merdeka 118 Tower: Innovations in DesignNo ratings yetMerdeka 118 Tower: Innovations in Design3 pages
- Puri 11 Heritage: Premium Living in TangerangNo ratings yetPuri 11 Heritage: Premium Living in Tangerang50 pages
- KEB COMBIVERT F5 Modular Drives OverviewNo ratings yetKEB COMBIVERT F5 Modular Drives Overview17 pages
- Manhole Cover Quality Control ProcedureNo ratings yetManhole Cover Quality Control Procedure25 pages
- Ilapak Delta 3000 Packaging Machine SpecsNo ratings yetIlapak Delta 3000 Packaging Machine Specs2 pages
- (Sustainable Production, Life Cycle Engineering and Management) Marius Winter-Eco-efficiency of Grinding Processes and Systems-Springer (2015) PDFNo ratings yet(Sustainable Production, Life Cycle Engineering and Management) Marius Winter-Eco-efficiency of Grinding Processes and Systems-Springer (2015) PDF248 pages
- Introduction to Database CharacteristicsNo ratings yetIntroduction to Database Characteristics8 pages
